Quarterlytics / Consumer Cyclical / Hardware, Equipment & Parts / TT Electronics / FY2011 Annual Report

TT Electronics
Annual Report 2011

TTG · LSE Consumer Cyclical
Claim this profile
Ticker TTG
Exchange LSE
Sector Consumer Cyclical
Industry Hardware, Equipment & Parts
Employees 5001-10,000
← All annual reports
FY2011 Annual Report · TT Electronics
Loading PDF…
TT electronics plc

Clive House
12 – 18 Queens Road
Weybridge
Surrey KT13 9XB

Reg No 87249

Tel   +44(0) 1932 825300
Fax  +44(0) 1932 836450

TT electronics plc Annual Report 2011

Embedding 
innovation

l

T
T
e
e
c
t
r
o
n
i
c
s
p
l
c

A
n
n
u
a

l

R
e
p
o
r
t
2
0
1
1

For further information on our group please visit:

www.ttelectronics.com

014995_TT_AR11_Cover.indd   1

21/03/2012   16:49

 
 
 
 
 
 
Contents
Overview

Embedding	innovation

1	
2	 Chairman’s	statement
2011	performance
3	

Our plan for growth

6	 Our	business	model
8	 Our	drivers
10	 Our	strategy	
Our	strategy	in	action
12	 –	Focus
14	 –	Innovation
16	 –	Globalisation
18	 –	Culture
20	 Execution
22	 Key	performance	indicators

Progress in 2011

Financial statements

Shareholder information

118		Five	year	record
119	 Shareholder	information

25	 How	we	are	structured
26	 Operating	review
28	 Components
31	 Sensors
34	
IMS
36		 Secure	Power
38	 Financial	review
41	

	Principal	risks	and	risk	
management	process

44	 Corporate	responsibility

Governance

47	
48	

Introduction	by	the	Chairman
	Board	of	Directors	and	
Company Secretary

50	 Operating	Board
51	 Corporate	Governance
57	 Nominations	Committee
58	 Audit	Committee
60	 Remuneration	report
67	 Other	statutory	disclosures

 Group accounts
70	 Statement	of	Directors’		

responsibilities

71		 Report	of	the	Independent		
Auditors	on	the	financial		
statements

72		 Consolidated	income	statement
73		 Consolidated	statement		
of comprehensive	income

74	 Consolidated	balance	sheet
75		 Consolidated	statement		
of	changes	in	equity
76		 Consolidated	cash	flow		

statement

77		 Notes	to	the	consolidated		
financial	statements

 Company accounts
112		Company	balance	sheet
113	 	Notes	to	the	Company	
financial statements

	Online	report

Please	see	our	website	for	additional	content:

www.ttelectronics.com

Using your smartphone, scan this 
code to access enriched content. 
Or	visit:	http://investors.	
ttelectronics.com/

Cautionary statement on forward-looking statements and related information

This	document	contains	a	number	of	forward-looking	statements	relating	to	the	Group/Company	with	respect	to,	amongst	others,	
the following:	financial	conditions;	results	of	operations;	economic	conditions	in	which	the	Group/Company	operates;	the	business	
of the	Group/Company;	and	management	plans	and	objectives.	The	Group/Company	considers	any	statements	that	are	not	historical	
facts	as	“forward-looking	statements”.	They	relate	to	events	and	trends	that	are	subject	to	risks	and	uncertainties	that	could	cause	
the	actual	results	and	financial	position	of	the	Group/Company	to	differ	materially	from	the	information	presented	in	the	relevant	
forward-looking	statement.	When	used	in	this	document	the	words	“estimate”,	“project”,	“intend”,	“aim”,	“anticipate”,	“believe”,	“expect”,	
“should”	and	similar	expressions,	as	they	relate	to	the	Group/Company	or	the	management	of	it,	are	intended	to	identify	such	
forward-looking	statements.	Readers	are	cautioned	not	to	place	undue	reliance	on	these	forward-looking	statements	which	speak	
only	as	at	the	date	of	this	document.	Neither	the	Group/Company	nor	any	member	of	the	Group’s/Company’s	Board	or	management	
undertake	any	obligation	publicly	to	update	or	revise	any	of	the	forward-looking	statements,	whether	as	a	result	of	new	information,	
future	events	or	otherwise,	save	in	respect	of	any	requirement	under	applicable	laws,	the	Listing	Rules,	and	other	regulations.

Designed	and	produced	by	Radley Yeldar	(www.ry.com)	using	the	paperless	proofing	system	Wizardry.	

TT	electronics	plc	are	committed	to	caring	for	the	environment	and	looking	for	sustainable	ways	to	minimise	our	impact	on	it.

This	report	has	been	printed	on	Hello	Silk	a	paper	which	is	certified	by	the	Forest	Stewardship	Council®.

The	paper	is	made	at	a	mill	with	EMAS	and	ISO	14001	environmental	management	system	accreditation.

This	report	was	printed	using	vegetable	oil	based	inks	by	a	CarbonNeutral®	printer	certified	to	ISO	14001 	
environmental	management	system	and	registered	to	EMAS	theEco	Management	Audit	Scheme.

FSC	–	Forest	Stewardship	Council.	This	ensures	there	is	an	audited	chain	of	custody	from	the	
tree	in	the	well-managed	forest	through	to	the	finished	document	in	the	printing	factory.

 ISO 14001	–	A	pattern	of	control	for	an	environmental	management	system	against	which	
an	organisation	can	be	credited	by	a	third	party.

014995_TT_AR11_Cover.indd   2

28/03/2012   19:32

 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
 Directors’ report – Overview

 Embedding innovation

TT electronics delivers performance critical solutions, turning 
research and technology into innovative products. Working 
closely with world leading manufacturers, we target markets 
with strong fundamental growth dynamics where the pace 
of deployment of electronics is being driven by increasing 
demands in terms of performance and reliability.

In 2011 we made further progress, improving operating margins 
to 5.8 per cent and ending the year with net cash of £15.2 million. 
We concentrated our focus on electronics with the successful sale of 
the last remaining business within the General Industrial division.

Entering 2012, the Group is well positioned with a strategy 
to create value for all stakeholders built on market focus, deep 
customer relationships, innovation and our global footprint. 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 1   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Overview

 Chairman’s statement

“I am very pleased with the significant 
improvement in operating performance 
in 2011. We continue to strengthen 
relationships with our customers, improve 
the way we innovate, and optimise our 
manufacturing footprint. These actions are 
having a significant positive impact on our 
competitive position and create a strong 
foundation for the Group’s development.”

I am pleased to report that TT electronics has delivered another set 
of improved results. Revenue from continuing operations increased 
to £591.3 million (2010: £555.5 million), an increase of 7.2 per cent at 
constant exchange rates, with an increase in operating profit before 
exceptional items of 37.3 per cent to £34.2 million (2010: £24.9 million). 
The Group ended the year with net cash of £15.2 million (2010: net 
debt £9.9 million). Headline EPS was 13.3 pence (2010: 9.0 pence). 

During the year we made significant progress on improving the 
Group’s competitive position. We strengthened relationships with our 
customers and sharpened our approach to product management 
and innovation, ensuring our resources are focused on delivering 
solutions for markets where we can create the most value. We 
delivered improved operating margins whilst continuing to invest for 
the future, including major programmes to align our manufacturing 
footprint with our global customers and to reduce our cost base. 

The programme to realise value from the General Industrial division 
has been successfully concluded with the sale of the last remaining 
business completed in July.

The actions we have taken and the ongoing investments we are 
making provide a solid foundation for the future. Focusing on our 
electronics businesses, we have a clear vision of the value that we 
bring to our customers through the delivery of innovative solutions 
based on our core technologies and engineering expertise. We are 
successfully building our position in markets with strong underlying 
growth drivers and in which the use of complex electronics is 
increasing to meet demands for improvements in performance. 

We continue to strive for best practice in corporate governance 
as set out later in this report, starting on page 46. In particular, 
we completed a thorough review of the Group’s risk management 
and internal audit processes. This identified a number of areas for 
improvement including the reorganisation of the risk and internal 

2 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

audit function and the appointment of a new Group Head of Risk 
and Assurance. Stephen King joined the Group as an independent 
non-executive Director with effect from 24 October 2011 bringing 
significant finance experience, combined with extensive knowledge 
of global manufacturing businesses. Stephen is a member of the 
Audit and Nominations Committees and will succeed David Crowther 
as Chairman of the Company’s Audit Committee at the conclusion 
of the 2012 Annual General Meeting.

David Crowther will be retiring from the Board following the 
conclusion of the Annual General Meeting in May 2012 after seven 
years as a non-executive Director. On behalf of my fellow Directors 
I would like to thank David for his valuable contribution to the Group, 
including his leadership as Chairman of the Audit Committee, during 
a period of significant change.

In recognition of the strong performance in 2011 and the Board’s 
continued confidence in the Group’s future prospects, the Board 
is pleased to recommend a final dividend of 3.2 pence which, 
when combined with the interim dividend of 1.2 pence, gives a total 
of 4.4 pence per share for the full year (2010: 2.8 pence per share), 
representing an increase of 57 per cent.

Our ability to provide critical solutions for major customers in markets 
with strong fundamental growth dynamics, coupled with the 
investments we are making to improve our competitive position, 
provide confidence that the Group will make further progress in 2012. 

Sean Watson
Chairman 

14 March 2012

 Directors’ report – Overview

 2011 performance

Revenue3

2011

2010

Operating profit margin2,3

£591.3m

£555.5m

2011

2010

+7.2% at constant exchange rates1

+130 bps

Profit before taxation2,3

Net cash/(debt)

2011

2010

+43.2%

£29.5m

2011

£20.6m

2010

+£25.1m

5.8%

4.5%

£15.2m

-£9.9m

37.3 per cent increase in operating profit² 
for 2011 to £34.2 million (£36.5 million after 
exceptional items)
Improvement in operating profit margin² 
to 5.8 per cent
Strong operating cash generation and 
proceeds from disposals resulting in closing 
net cash of £15.2 million
Significant improvements in the Group’s 
competitive position with growth in key 
customer accounts and sharper focus on 
product management and innovation

Major programmes being implemented to 
reduce the cost base and align the Group’s 
global manufacturing footprint with key 
growth markets
Increased concentration on electronics 
businesses and platform in place to create 
value for stakeholders
Recommended final dividend of 3.2 pence 
per share increasing total dividend for 2011 
by 57 per cent to 4.4 pence per share 
(2010: 2.8 pence) 

1  +6.4% at actual exchange rates

2  Before exceptional items

3  Continuing operations

TT electronics plc 3   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Our plan for 
growth

In this section
6  Our business model
8  Our drivers
10  Our strategy 
Our strategy in action
12  – Focus
14  – Innovation
16  – Globalisation
18  – Culture
20  Execution
22  Key performance indicators

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 5   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Our plan for growth

 Our business model

Vision
To be the preferred and most trusted provider of performance critical technology 
solutions to world leading manufacturers, embedding innovation in everything we do.
•  We are focused on markets where the pace of deployment of complex electronics is driven 

by increasing demands in terms of performance, regulation and growth and prosperity
•  We have a clear strategy to create value for all stakeholders through innovation, focus 

and globalisation underpinned by our culture 

•  We have priorities and plans in place and a clear set of key performance indicators 

to measure our progress

Vision

Drivers

Strategy

Execution

KPIs

Vision

6 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Performance

Focus

Drivers

Regulation

Strategy

Innovation

Culture

Execution

Growth and prosperity

Globalisation

Investment in 
people 

Total business 
excellence

Acquisitions

Targeting 
higher growth 
markets

Increasing 
customer 
intimacy

Differentiation 
through 
innovation

International 
expansion 
focused on 
emerging 
regions

KPIs

Organic 
revenue 
growth

Operating 
profit  
margins

EPS  
growth

Relative  
total 
shareholder 
return

Operating 
cash 
conversion

Safety 
performance

Employee 
engagement

Training  
and 
communities

TT electronics plc 7   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Our plan for growth

 Our drivers

Market demand is driven by the following long-term growth drivers:

Performance

Manufacturers are designing increasingly sophisticated products which rely 
upon more complex electronic systems to deliver increased functionality, 
efficiency and power. In addition, high reliability electro-mechanical devices 
are replacing hydraulics to reduce weight and increase reliability. As new 
technology becomes available it is rapidly adopted and deployed, thereby 
fuelling further demand.

Regulation

Regulation, stemming from safety and environmental concerns, drives many 
of the markets in which we operate. Climate change protocols are driving 
investment in new forms of energy generation and its efficient distribution 
and consumption. Emissions legislation is resulting in significant investment 
in the transportation and aerospace markets to improve performance, 
reduce weight and treat exhaust gases. 

Growth and prosperity

Rising living standards and increasing disposable income, particularly in 
certain emerging economies, is driving demand in the energy, medical, 
transportation and aerospace markets.

8 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Drivers

Strategy

Execution

KPIs

These drivers underpin the requirement for sophisticated electronics in each 
of our markets:

Transportation

Industrial

Energy

Demand for transportation (from 
mass transit systems to passenger cars) 
is growing, particularly in emerging 
economies. Sophisticated electronics 
are being used to improve safety and 
performance and to reduce emissions 
to meet tighter regulations. Features 
introduced on premium cars are being 
deployed on other models and in other 
transportation segments.

Our focus is on growth segments 
within the industrial market where 
the deployment of electronics is 
being driven by the complexity 
of the equipment and processes 
being used. These segments 
include automation and control 
for manufacturing and process 
equipment, and test and measurement.

There is significant investment in new 
technologies for energy generation to 
meet increasing demand and tighter 
environmental regulations, together 
with the deployment of new smart grid 
technologies to improve the efficiency 
of the distribution network and reduce 
energy consumption.

Medical

Defence

Aerospace

Demand for medical equipment and 
devices is increasing as more individuals 
and governments are able to afford 
access to medical care, together with 
aging populations in many developed 
countries. Additionally, devices are 
becoming more sophisticated with 
increasingly complex electronic content.

Investment in growth areas including 
communications networks, unmanned 
vehicles and other mission critical 
electronic systems is forecast to continue. 

Commercial airline production is 
forecast to grow due to globalisation 
and the continued development of 
emerging markets. High performance 
electronics are reducing weight and 
improving efficiencies. Demand for 
satellites is increasing, driven by the 
growth of satellite based services.

TT electronics plc 9   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Our plan for growth

 Our strategy 

Our strategy is to create value for our stakeholders by delivering innovative solutions 
to world leading manufacturers in markets with good long-term growth dynamics. 
We will build upon our existing global footprint to ensure we continue to win new 
business in all major regions of the world. Our culture and values ensure a consistent 
set of standards and behaviours throughout the Group.

Focus

We are focused on the following higher growth 
markets: aerospace, defence, energy, medical, 
transportation and specific segments of the 
industrial market. Within these markets we are 
building our position with leading global players 
through our key account programme.

Actions
•  Alignment throughout the organisation on 

– target markets

– key accounts

•  Clear value proposition developed

Effect
• 

Increasing proportion of sales and new business  
opportunities from target markets

•  Significant growth from key accounts

•  Certain segments de-emphasised

Innovation

We create high value differentiated solutions for 
challenging applications built upon our broad 
platform technologies, engineering expertise and 
our reputation in markets which value reliability. 
Our “trusted partner” status with major customers 
leads to early involvement in their development 
programmes and provides us with visibility of 
their future technology roadmaps. 

Actions
•  Business unit/product managers appointed

•  Product roadmaps developed

•  Deeper engagement with key customers

Effect
•  Effective product management

  – Focused research and development resources

  – Visibility of customers’ technology roadmaps

  –  Platform technologies and “product families” 

for target markets

10 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Drivers

Strategy

Execution

KPIs

Globalisation

Culture

The Group is well positioned to benefit from 
globalisation with sales and engineering teams 
and leading international and domestic customers 
in all major regions. We are able to support our 
customers from manufacturing and service 
locations in the Americas, Europe and Asia.

We have a clear set of values that provide a 
framework within which we expect all of our 
employees to operate. We put the customer 
at the heart of everything we do supported by 
teamwork, innovation and a passion for excellence; 
all underpinned by a commitment to invest in our 
employees and to act with integrity at all times.

Actions
•  Global organisation structure implemented

Actions

•  Core values embedded in organisation

– Sales teams in all major regions

  – Active programme of internal communication

– Engineering support close to customers

  – Group wide training and compliance programmes

– Manufacturing footprint in Americas, Europe and Asia

  – “Voice of Customer” elevated

– Uniform processes and quality standards

  – Structured programmes to identify and develop talent

Effect
•  Ability to support customers worldwide

  – Operational excellence programme established

  – Cross functional global teams in place

•  Recognised as a global partner by major customers

•  New wins with international and domestic customers in 

all major regions

•  Developing lower cost centres of excellence in Mexico, India, 

China and Romania

Effect
•  Reputation for integrity and strong ethical approach

•  Greater customer intimacy and stronger relationships

•  Engaged employees with opportunities for development

•  Efficiency improvements

• 

Increased pace of execution

TT electronics plc 11   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Our plan for growth

 Our strategy in action
 Focus

We are focused on developing strong partnerships with leading manufacturers in 
markets with good long-term growth dynamics. Through our key account programme 
we work closely with major companies that value our ability to support them as they 
develop new products. We align our resources with these customers where our 
engineering expertise and global footprint enable us to create a differentiated value 
proposition, providing the basis for the development of long-term relationships that 
benefit both parties.

Volkswagen AG

The Volkswagen Group is one of the world’s leading automobile 
manufacturers and the largest car maker in Europe. It sells its vehicles in 153 
countries and operates 62 production plants. Revenue in 2011 was €159 billion. 

We have worked in partnership with VW since the early 1980s. In 2010 TT 
implemented a global management structure and committed to further 
developing its worldwide manufacturing and support capabilities to align 
itself with its major customers. This was recognised by VW and TT is 
now a key technology partner working closely with their design engineers 
and manufacturing plants globally.

“ As a key strategic supplier partner we are working closely with TT on a number 
of sensors for our latest global engine platform that will be manufactured in 
Germany, China and Mexico. TT’s ability and commitment to support us in these 
regions, together with their engineering experience and their willingness to 
invest in our relationship, makes them an ideal partner for us. They have been 
awarded a significant number of speed and temperature sensor applications 
on the new engine platform and we are actively looking at additional 
opportunities together.”

 Dr. Michael Kilger, Director R&D Components Powertrain Electronics, Audi

12 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Aero Engine Controls

Aero Engine Controls (AEC) is a joint venture between Rolls-Royce plc and 
Goodrich Corporation, two leading aerospace manufacturers, that provides 
engine control systems and engine intelligence to the aerospace industry. 

Since the formation of the joint venture, we have been working closely 
with AEC developing critical products that are able to operate reliably in 
the harsh environments found in aircraft engines. Our Components division 
supplies a range of microcircuits and resistors for AEC’s engine control 
systems which improve fuel efficiency. These technologies are in use on 
today’s most advanced aircraft including the Boeing 787 and Airbus A350.

“ We really value the aerospace expertise and technology that TT provides 
for our engine control systems. In these critical applications, where failure 
is not an option, we need suppliers who are able to provide the right 
technical solutions to enable us to meet the stringent demands of 
our customers.”

 Annette Rothwell, Vice President Supply Chain, Aero Engine Controls

Meggitt PLC

Meggitt PLC is a global engineering group specialising in extreme 
environment components and smart sub-systems for the aerospace, 
defence and energy markets. Revenue in 2010 was £1.2 billion.

Following a competitive tender process, the IMS division was selected as a 
preferred supplier partner. This success was based on our track record of 
providing global manufacturing and supply chain services from our facilities 
in the US, Europe and Asia with uniform process and quality co-ordinated 
through a single point of contact for the customer.

“ TT electronics’ commitment to excellence in manufacturing and supply 
chain performance for leading aerospace and defence organisations 
is enabling Meggitt to better satisfy the challenging requirements 
of our marketplace. We value the IMS division’s global footprint and 
investment in new technologies as these are in step with our own plans 
for organic growth in established and emerging markets. A high level 
of responsiveness through strong lines of communication is proving 
to be a hallmark of TT electronics’ approach to customer relationships.”

 Martin Calland, Group Head of Procurement, Meggitt PLC

Drivers

Strategy

Execution

KPIs

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 13   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Our plan for growth

 Our strategy in action
 Innovation

Our ability to innovate enables 
us to create competitive 
advantage, gain market 
share and deliver higher 
financial returns. Our 
engineering development 
teams are often the best in 
their field in terms of their 
knowledge and experience 
of our core technologies. 
They support our applications 
engineers who work closely 
with the customer to turn 
our ideas and technology 
into differentiated solutions. 

Americas
Core technology platform 
is being customised and 
packaged to be a high 
performance sensor that 
will improve reliability, 
safety and reduce emissions 
in the truck, bus and 
agricultural markets.

Typical sensor value stream

Global design centres of excellence 
develop core technology platforms 
which are then customised for 
specific applications and regions. 
Example shown is a chassis height 
sensor used to control the height 
and enhance the handling of the 
vehicle to improve safety and meet 
legislative requirements.

Sensing element with 
application-specific 
integrated circuit

14 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Core technology platform

Drivers

Strategy

Execution

KPIs

China
Core technology platform 
used in a high performance 
sensor that reduces 
emissions and improves 
performance in the volume 
small car sector. 

India
Core technology platform 
used in a high performance 
sensor that improves 
reliability, safety and 
performance in the local 
two wheeler market. 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

Germany
R&D centre of excellence 
designed a core technology 
platform for speed and position 
sensing that is then customised 
and packaged by local teams 
for specific applications.

Germany
Core technology platform 
used in a high performance 
sensor that is at the heart 
of performance engines 
for the luxury car market. 

Core technology platform

Final packaged product for 
local market and application

Interface and control  
software

Environmental package for 
harsh environments (for 
example -40°C to + 130°C)

Application specific 
packaging and interface 
electronics

TT electronics plc 15   
Annual Report 2011

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ report – Our plan for growth

Our strategy in action
Globalisation

Delivering value 
worldwide
TT is well positioned globally 
with sales, engineering and 
manufacturing in all major 
regions. Key account managers 
align these resources to 
support major customers.

Schneider
Schneider is a global specialist 
in energy management, with 
solutions for power and control, 
energy efficiency, automation 
and renewable energy. Having 
been identified as a key account 
in 2009, Schneider nominated 
TT electronics as a key supplier 
in early 2010. We now work 
with their design centres 
worldwide and visit multiple 
sites each week to work on new 
opportunities. We ship products 
to many locations supporting 
their manufacturing organisation, 
creating a strong partnership that 
drives value for both businesses. 

16 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

USA

Product is shipped to Schneider and their 
fulfilment partners worldwide, with local 
teams ensuring continuity in the supply chain.

France

TT’s key account 
managers work closely 
with Schneider’s global 
procurement team 
headquartered in 
Grenoble, France.

India

China 

Field applications engineers work closely 
with Schneider’s design centres in China, 
India, France and America designing high 
performance electronic components that 
meet demanding requirements.

Our global reach

Drivers

Strategy

Execution

KPIs

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

The Americas

Headcount 
Percentage of Group revenue 

Europe, Middle East and Africa

Headcount  
Percentage of Group revenue 

Asia

Headcount  
Percentage of Group revenue 

2,432
27%

2,474
61%

1,309
12%

TT electronics plc 17   
Annual Report 2011

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Our plan for growth

 Our strategy in action
 Culture

Our values define who we are and how we do business, creating a consistent set of 
standards and behaviours throughout the Group. This is increasingly important in 
an environment that requires our employees to operate across broad geographies 
in a less hierarchical structure, responding rapidly to opportunities as they arise.

Our values

Customer  
driven

Integrity

Passion for 
excellence

We are in business to 
deliver value to our 
customers. Everything we 
do is geared to providing 
world-class products 
and the best possible 
customer experience.

We will always be 
straightforward and 
transparent in our 
dealings. Upholding 
high ethical standards 
and maintaining 
integrity are cornerstones 
of our business. 
We are committed 
to our corporate and 
social responsibilities.

We stretch ourselves 
to make the difference 
and look for continuous  
improvements by  
constantly challenging  
the status quo.

18 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
Drivers

Strategy

Execution

KPIs

People  
focused

Innovative,  
problem solving

Teamwork

Success for our business 
will be determined by 
our people. We aim to 
attract, retain and develop 
high quality staff and 
ensure that they are 
fully committed and 
positively engaged.

We pride ourselves on 
our ability to solve our 
customers’ problems, 
focusing on delivering 
innovative solutions in 
a timely manner.

Teamwork underpins our 
business. We encourage a 
teamworking environment, 
constantly challenging 
each other whilst 
maintaining mutual 
respect and a clear focus 
on the achievement of 
common goals.

TT electronics plc 19   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ report – Our plan for growth

Execution

Our priorities reflect our strategy and are designed to strengthen the Group. 
These priorities translate the strategy into deliverable plans within each division.

Targeting higher 
growth markets

All of our internal resources are focused on markets 
with good long-term growth drivers. Product 
roadmaps are in place to ensure we develop the 
right technologies. Our sales teams have clear 
objectives to serve our customers, supported 
by manufacturing and customer service. 

Increasing customer 
intimacy

We aim to build long-term relationships with 
our customers. We undertake regular business 
reviews with our major customers and constantly 
monitor our quality, responsiveness and on time 
delivery performance. We are investing in the key 
account programme and training for our sales 
and applications engineering teams. In addition, 
we continue to upgrade our IT systems to make 
it easier for our customers to do business with us.

International  
expansion

We are investing in our capabilities in emerging 
markets with projects underway to expand our 
campus facility in China, increase our capabilities 
in Mexico (where the Sensors division will begin 
manufacturing in late 2012) and further develop 
our position in India. Going forward, we expect the 
pace of investment in these regions to continue.

Differentiation 
through innovation

We are committed to developing new products 
and technologies. We have clear development 
plans for 2012. These are aligned to our customers’ 
technology roadmaps due to our focus on 
specific markets and our significant investment 
in product management.

20 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Investment  
in people

Our people are key to our success. We invest 
in training and development and ensure that 
talented individuals are recognised and provided 
with opportunities to progress within the Group. 
We recently commenced the roll-out of a global 
management development programme aimed 
at 400 managers, in addition to providing courses 
focused on specific functions including sales and 
procurement. We will continue to supplement 
our own talent with key hires where necessary. 

Acquisitions

We will look to acquire technologies and 
businesses that have a good fit with our strategy. 
These businesses will be technology leaders 
serving our target markets, will ideally accelerate 
our geographic growth, particularly in Asia and 
Latin America, and will share our culture and values.

Drivers

Strategy

Execution

KPIs

Total business  
excellence

We continue to standardise processes, sharing 
expertise and best practice across the Group. 
Lean manufacturing, continuous improvement 
initiatives and the development of lower cost 
manufacturing facilities in Mexico, Romania, 
India and China are delivering sustainable 
improvements in cost, quality and on time delivery.

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 21   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ report – Our plan for growth

Key performance indicators

We use a number of financial and non-financial key performance indicators (KPIs), 
set in 2009, to measure our performance

Financial KPIs¹

Organic revenue  
growth

Earnings per share  
(EPS) growth

Operating cash  
conversion

Relative total shareholder 
return (TSR)

2011

2010

2009

7.2%

23.5%

-24.3%

2011

2010

2009

13.3p

9.0p

-1.2p

2011

2010

2009

106%

169%

1,040%

2011

2010

2009

3rd Quartile

1st Quartile

2nd Quartile

TARGET – EACH yEAR, TO 2014
Mid to high  
single digits

TARGET
Year on year growth  
of 3% in excess of RPI

TARGET – EACH yEAR, TO 2012
100%

Definition
Organic revenue growth measures 
the change in revenue in the 
current year compared with the 
prior year from continuing Group 
operations. The effects of currency 
movements and acquisitions made 
during the current or prior financial 
year have been removed.

We have chosen this specific 
KPI because our strategy is to 
participate in markets which 
have the ability to provide us 
with growth opportunities.

Performance
Organic revenue growth 
benefited from strong sales in many 
key markets.

Definition
EPS growth is calculated as profit 
before exceptional items from 
continuing operations attributable 
to shareholders divided by the 
weighted average number of 
shares in issue during the year.

We have chosen EPS growth as 
a KPI as it is a standard metric to 
determine corporate profitability 
for shareholders. 

In addition, it is a measure used as 
one of the performance conditions 
in the Group’s Long Term Incentive 
Plan – see further detail on page 62.

Performance
There was a significant 
improvement in EPS during the 
year, delivering growth of 48 per 
cent, well ahead of the target. 

Definition
Operating cash conversion is 
defined as cash generated from 
continuing operations after capital 
and development expenditure, 
expressed as a percentage of 
operating profit before exceptional 
items from continuing operations. 
Cash conversion is an important 
metric to track the management 
of our working capital and capital 
expenditure programme.

Performance
The cash conversion target 
of 100 per cent was exceeded 
in 2011 due to the delivery 
of operational efficiencies 
and active management of 
the Group’s working capital.

TARGET
Above median performance 
against the FTSE Small Cap 
(excluding investment trusts)

Definition
TSR is defined as capital growth 
plus dividends paid, assuming 
dividends are re-invested over 
the period using a three-month 
opening and closing average.

We believe that TSR is an important 
measure of the delivery of 
shareholder value as well as 
relative performance. In addition, 
it is a measure used as one of 
the performance conditions in 
the Group’s Long Term Incentive 
Plan – see further detail on page 62.

Performance
The Group’s TSR for 2011 was 
-11.3 per cent compared to the 
median of the comparator group 
of -11.2 per cent. TSR for 2010 and 
2011 combined would place the 
Group in the first quartile.

¹All comparative data is as previously published in the 2009 and 2010 Annual Reports.

22 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Drivers

Strategy

Execution

KPIs

Financial KPIs

Operating profit  
margin

2011

2010

2009
TARGET – IN MEDIUM TERM
Group 
8–10%

Non-financial KPIs

Safety  
performance

Employee  
engagement

5.8%

4.5%

1.4%

2011

2010

2009

TARGET – IN MEDIUM TERM
Components
10%

6.1%

4.6%

3.1%

2011

2010

5.1

8.5

2011

2010

4.31

4.28

TARGET – IN MEDIUM TERM

TARGET – IN MEDIUM TERM

Lower than UK 
manufacturing 
benchmark, 2011: 5.3

Achieve UK mid-
size manufacturing 
benchmark, 2011: 4.67

2011

2010

2009

5.3%

2.7%

-3.7%

2011

2010

2009

TARGET – IN LONGER TERM
Sensors 
10%

TARGET – IN MEDIUM TERM
IMS 
6–8%

6.7%

7.3%

8.1%

2011

2010

2009

TARGET – IN SHORT TERM
Secure Power 
10%

Definition
Operating profit margin is 
defined as operating profit 
before exceptional items from 
continuing operations expressed 
as a percentage of revenue 
from continuing operations.

This KPI is appropriate because 
we are focused on increasing 
the proportion of revenue from 
those markets where we can 
make higher returns, in addition 
to delivering an improvement 
in operational efficiency.

Performance
Operating margins improved 
in all businesses with the 
exception of Secure Power.

5.1%

4.7%

3.2%

Definition
The number of occupational 
injuries resulting in three or more 
days absence per 1,000 employees.

This KPI allows us to compare 
our performance with that of our 
peers. We use a UK benchmark 
published by the Health and 
Safety Executive and apply this 
to all of our facilities worldwide 
reflecting our commitment 
to raise standards globally. 

Performance
We are committed to targeting 
zero occupational injuries. 
The injury rate improved in 
2011 and was better than the 
UK manufacturing benchmark.

Training and communities

Understanding our current 
capabilities and future requirements 
and identifying talent within the 
Group is essential to sustaining 
our growth. We made significant 
improvements to our talent 
management and succession 
planning process throughout 2011. 
It has been designed to promote 
from within through career 
development, building on 
potential talent across all divisions 
and geographies. In 2011, we 
continued to support our future 
leaders through individually tailored 

Definition
We use our employee survey to 
measure how our employees feel 
about working in TT using a scale 
of 1 (low) to 7 (high) against eight 
factors. We benchmark the results 
against mid-size UK manufacturing 
companies as surveyed by Best 
Companies Ltd. 

Performance
The response rate from this year’s 
survey was a creditable 65 per cent, 
compared to an industry 
benchmark of 50 per cent.
The results show an improvement 
in our overall engagement score 
against the backdrop of 
considerable change in the business 
during 2011. Whilst the score has 
increased, with good progress in 
areas of focus, it remains below the 
benchmark. We will share the results 
of the latest survey with our 
employees and develop plans to 
deliver further improvements.

mentoring and development plans 
and maintained our graduate and 
apprenticeship programmes at 
selected sites. During 2012 we will 
continue to encourage our people 
to use the increasing range of 
training programmes on offer.

The 2010 engagement survey 
highlighted the need to increase 
our engagement with the 
communities in which we operate.  
A wide range of activities took 
place during the year as set out 
on page 45. 

TT electronics plc 23   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Progress  
in 2011

In this section
25  How we are structured
26  Operating review
28  Components
31  Sensors
34 
IMS
36   Secure Power
38  Financial review
41 
44  Corporate responsibility

 Principal risks and risk management process

24 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

 How we are structured

The Group consists of four divisions. The Components, Sensors and IMS divisions 
all provide electronic products and services to common target markets worldwide. 
The Secure Power division provides standby power solutions, principally to 
customers in Central and South America and the UK. 

Components

Sensors

The division delivers innovative electronic solutions providing 
increased functionality, efficiency and control, coupled with best 
in class service and support worldwide. Products include fixed 
and variable resistors, optoelectronics, power modules, control 
circuitry, magnetics and interconnect solutions for customers in 
the transportation, industrial, defence, aerospace, medical and 
energy markets. 

Provides sensing solutions for critical applications which require 
high levels of expertise, precision and reliability, often operating in 
extremely harsh environments. Products include speed, direction, 
position, temperature and pressure sensor assemblies primarily 
for customers in the transportation and industrial markets. 

k Further detail: See page 28

Revenue

Operating profit

Proportion of 
Group revenue

£242.7m
£14.8m

41%

IMS 

The division draws on its design engineering capabilities, 
flexibility and word-class facilities to provide high quality electronic 
manufacturing support to customers in the premium industrial, 
medical, defence and aerospace sectors. The business has a broad 
capability from board assembly to full systems integration.

k Further detail: See page 31

41%

Revenue

Operating profit

Proportion of 
Group revenue

£166.9m
£8.8m

28%

28%

Secure Power

Provides generating sets and uninterruptible power supplies to a 
wide variety of global industries which require reliable consistent 
power including the petrochemical, medical, utilities and financial 
services sectors. The division is focused on supplying turnkey 
solutions for major one-off projects and differentiated medium 
to high power generating sets with a focus on quality, reliability 
and service.

k Further detail: See page 34

Revenue

Operating profit

Proportion of 
Group revenue

£100.0m
£5.1m

17%

k Further detail: See page 36

17%

Revenue

Operating profit

Proportion of 
Group revenue

£81.7m
£5.5m

14%

14%

TT electronics plc 25   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

 Operating review

Geraint Anderson Group Chief Executive

Shatish Dasani Group Finance Director

14 March 2012

14 March 2012

TT delivered a strong improvement in performance in 2011 with 
a 37.3 per cent increase in operating profit before exceptional items 
and ended the year in a net cash position.

Group overview

The Group is now more focused, following 
completion of the sale of the General Industrial 
businesses. As an electronics group we have 
a clear vision to deliver performance critical 
solutions by turning ideas and technology into 
innovative products that our customers need. 
As set out on pages 8 and 9, we are targeting 
markets with strong fundamental growth 
dynamics and where the pace of deployment 
of electronics is being driven by increasing 
demands in terms of performance and reliability. 

In 2011 the Group performed strongly. Having 
deployed our resources to ensure that we put 
the customer at the heart of our business, it has 
been encouraging to see this delivering tangible 
results. We strengthened our relationships with 
key customers and secured new business in target 
markets. We have regular reviews with our major 
customers and, whilst significant opportunity exists 
for further improvement, we have seen positive 
progress as illustrated by what our customers 
say about us on pages 12 and 13. We added four 
customers to our key account programme during 
the year and aggregate revenue from our key 
accounts as a group increased by more than 
11 per cent. Three of the customers added to the 
programme are based in Asia and we relocated 
key members of our management team to China 
during the year, reflecting the growth potential 
of this region for the Group.

We have made good progress developing our 
position in markets which we believe present the 
greatest opportunity. Revenue from the medical 
market increased by 35 per cent at constant 
currency rates due to particularly strong growth 
in this segment by the IMS division and we also 
secured a number of new customers in the 
Components division. The passenger car market 
remained the largest segment for the Group 
representing 35 per cent of revenue due to strong 
demand from Daimler, BMW and VW and from 
customers in emerging markets. We remain 
committed to reducing this to below 30 per cent 
of Group revenue in the medium term by growing 
our business in other areas more rapidly. Revenue 
from other transportation markets, including trucks, 
buses and off-road vehicles grew by more than 
37 per cent to approximately £47 million and 
revenue from industrial markets increased by 
9 per cent. Sales to the aerospace segment 
increased by 43 per cent whilst sales to defence 
markets decreased by 16 per cent. Revenue 
from power generation decreased by 6 per cent 
reflecting lower sales in the Secure Power division. 
Sales to the telecom and computing markets 
reduced by 27 per cent reflecting our strategic focus.

We continued to invest in our people, 
strengthening the divisional management 
teams and increasing training and development. 
This included rolling out the first phase of a 
global management development programme 
(see page 21). 

Revenue

2011

2010

+7.2%*

Operating profit**

2011

2010

+37.3%

Operating profit margin**

2011

2010

+130 bps

£591.3m

£555.5m

£34.2m

£24.9m

5.8%

4.5%

Capital employed***

2011

2010

-6.8%

£176.2m

£189.0m

Year end headcount

2011

2010

+1.7%

Operating cash flow**

2011

2010

+4.7%

6,236

6,130

£63.0m

£60.2m

*  At constant exchange rates 

**  Before exceptional items

***  Capital employed represents net assets  

less net cash/(debt)

26 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
Group overview (continued)

Revenue

We continue to improve our international 
operational footprint to increase profitability 
and better support our global business. We are 
developing regional lower cost manufacturing 
centres of excellence and our new facility in 
Romania is expected to begin production in the 
second quarter of 2012. We are doubling the size 
of our existing Components division facility in 
Mexicali, Mexico, to accommodate production lines 
that are being relocated from other sites, including 
our facility in Boone, North Carolina, which will be 
closed by the end of 2012. In addition, the Sensors 
division is making significant investments to further 
develop existing operations in India and China, 
and a new manufacturing operation is being 
established in Mexico to serve the North and 
South American markets, with manufacturing 
due to commence at the end of 2012.

We completed a review of our risk management 
and internal audit processes which resulted in the 
re-organisation of the risk and internal audit 
function and the appointment of a Group Head 
of Risk and Assurance to ensure that our risk 
management process is robust, consistently 
applied across the Group and aligned to the 
strategy (see page 41 for further detail). 

In July, we completed the disposal of AEI 
Compounds Limited, the last remaining business 
within the General Industrial division, comprising 
those businesses identified in the Strategic Review 
in 2009 as non-core and to be run for value. In total, 
over the years, the Group received more than 
£30 million net proceeds, considerably exceeding 
the Board’s initial expectations.

Market environment

The broad market recovery seen during 2010 
continued into 2011 and we experienced increased 
demand in the majority of our markets in the first 
half of the year. There was a sharp increase in orders 
in certain markets immediately following 
the Japanese earthquake. This particularly affected 
our Components and IMS divisions which saw a  
re-balancing in the latter part of the year as 
customers reduced inventory and reacted to 
increasing macroeconomic uncertainty, particularly 
in Europe. Demand from customers in the 
passenger car and transportation markets 
remained robust throughout the year.

Revenue from continuing operations increased by 
6.4 per cent to £591.3 million (2010: £555.5 million) 
after including an adverse foreign exchange impact 
of approximately £4.1 million. Excluding this foreign 
exchange impact, the underlying growth in 
revenue was 7.2 per cent, against our target of 
mid to high single digit growth. Our electronics 
businesses, comprising the Components, Sensors 
and IMS divisions represented 86.2 per cent of sales 
and grew by 4.9 per cent, 14.9 per cent and 9.7 per 
cent respectively on an underlying basis. Revenue 
in the Secure Power division fell by 2.3 per cent 
on an underlying basis as a result of challenging 
trading conditions in the Mexican and South 
American markets in the first half of the year.

Operating profit

The strong overall revenue performance, new 
business at improved margins and the impact of 
our operational excellence programme resulted in 
an operating profit from continuing operations 
(before exceptional items) of £34.2 million, an 
increase of 37.3 per cent compared to 2010. All 
divisions delivered higher operating profit margins, 
with the exception of Secure Power where margins 
declined slightly. The overall Group operating profit 
margin increased from 4.5 per cent to 5.8 per cent 
and significant potential remains to increase 
margins and achieve the target for the Group of 
8 to 10 per cent as set out on page 23. The adverse 
impact of foreign exchange variations on the 
translation of operating profit was £0.7 million. 

Group outlook

We are focused on providing critical technology 
to markets with strong fundamental growth 
dynamics where the deployment of complex 
electronics is increasing. This will drive demand 
for our solutions even if the macroeconomic 
environment remains unpredictable. We are 
investing to improve further the Group’s 
competitive position for the medium and 
longer term with a number of important projects 
expected to begin to have a positive impact on 
overall Group performance towards the end of 
the year. As a result of this and a sharp increase 
in orders in certain markets immediately following 
the Japanese earthquake in the first half of last year, 
we anticipate that performance in the current year 
will be more weighted to the second half. The 
good progress we are making provides confidence 
that we will meet the performance targets set.

TT electronics plc 27   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

 Components

“ With the new organisation in place I am excited about the 
opportunities in 2012. We will continue improving performance 
by completing a number of initiatives to optimise our operational 
footprint. We will also begin to see the benefit of the actions we 
have taken to accelerate the introduction of new products for our 
target markets.”

  Billal Hammoud Divisional Chief Executive – Components

Watch a video of Billal:
http://annualreports.
ttelectronics.com

The Components division is focused on 
creating value by delivering innovative 
electronic solutions with increased 
functionality, efficiency and control, coupled 
with best in class service and support 
worldwide. With facilities in North America, 
Europe and Asia, a sales presence in all major 
markets and application engineers strategically 
located around the world, the division is well 
positioned to serve customers in all regions. 

Strategy

The division targets markets with underlying 
growth drivers (as set out on pages 8 and 9) 
where it can create value based upon its 
technology and engineering expertise. It works 
closely with its customers, anticipating their needs, 
turning ideas and technology into differentiated 
solutions. It is focused on increasing the pace of 
new product introduction through improvements 
in product management and delivering wide 
ranging operational improvements that make 
it easier for customers to do business with the 
division and contribute to increased profitability.

Progress

The division successfully completed the transition 
to a business unit structure in 2011, creating 
alignment around key products and technologies, 
supported by global functions to drive best 
practices. This new structure is a key enabler for 
the efficient development of new products and 
for optimising our manufacturing footprint 
and supply chains. 

The development of the product portfolio is a 
critical focus. Recognising this, we appointed 
a Vice President of Marketing (a newly created 
position) in the third quarter of 2011, responsible 
for ensuring that our product development plans 
accurately align with our customers’ technology 
roadmaps. In addition, working in conjunction with 
the business unit and functional leaders, a new 
product introduction programme has been 
implemented that focuses on gathering inputs 
from our customers to identify their current and 
future needs. This process will be supplemented 
in the first half of 2012 by the introduction of a 
project portfolio management tool which will 
provide a framework for effectively managing 
and prioritising the portfolio of development 
projects and the related spend. All of these actions 
are designed to increase the value that we capture, 
the pace of new product introduction and the 
return on engineering investment, underpinning 
improvements in revenue and profit in 2012 
and beyond.

We are seeing continued benefits from the global 
sales structure, the investments made in the sales 
team in 2011 and the focus on growth markets.  
Our opportunity pipeline doubled from December 
2010 to December 2011, with a major proportion 
of the growth generated through key account 
activities, improved engagement with channel 
partners and targeted marketing campaigns 
linked to specific products and applications. 
Several contracts were won with new customers 
in China during the year and we doubled the 
number of local sales and application engineering 
resources. In 2012 we are implementing a new 
campaign process to focus our sales resources 
on high growth segments where we can offer 
multiple products and create the greatest value 
for our customers. 

£242.7m

£234.6m

£14.8m

£10.7m

6.1%

4.6%

£119.7m

£128.3m

3,219

3,183

Revenue

2011

2010

+4.9%*

Operating profit**

2011

2010

+38.3%

Operating profit margin**

2011

2010

+150 bps

Capital employed

2011

2010

-6.7%

Year end headcount

2011

2010

+1.1%

*  At constant exchange rates 

** Before exceptional items

28 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Applying innovation 
in space

TT electronics has significant experience supplying highly-
engineered electronic components to customers in the space 
industry including Tesat-Spacecom, a subsidiary of EADS Astrium 
NV. In 2011, our applications engineering teams worked closely 
with Tesat-Spacecom’s design department in Backnang near 
Stuttgart, Germany, to develop an improved RF power amplifier, 
a key component in communications satellites. Our high 
reliability hermetic packaging “know-how” and our experience 
in semiconductor technologies enabled us to develop a radiation 
tolerant product meeting rigorous European Space Agency 
standards. It is designed to operate reliably for a programme 
life of more than ten years in the harsh space environment.

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

EUTELSAT 9B, EADS Astrium´s high-power broadcast satellite, 
scheduled for launch end of 2014. © Astrium

TT electronics plc 29   
Annual Report 2011

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

 Components continued

Progress (continued)

Markets

The operations team delivered improvements in 
efficiency, quality and on-time delivery through the 
implementation of lean manufacturing principles, 
six sigma and investments in infrastructure, 
including in the area of enterprise resource 
planning. As previously announced, we are 
opening a new lower cost facility in Romania 
to accommodate increasing customer demand. 
The fit out programme is well underway and 
manufacturing is expected to start in the second 
quarter of 2012. In August we announced the 
closure of our facility in Boone, North Carolina as 
part of the Group’s strategy to align its footprint 
with key customers and increase profitability. 
We are doubling the size of our facility in Mexicali 
to accommodate production lines that are being 
relocated. The full year benefit of this project will 
be realised from 2013 and is on target to be in the 
region of £2.5 million per year. 

The division’s principal competitors include Bourns, 
Fairchild, Koa, Semikron and Vishay.

The broad market recovery in 2010 continued in 
the first half of 2011. The earthquake in Japan led to 
sharp increases in order patterns as our customers 
sought to secure component supplies. Demand 
softened in the latter part of 2011, reflecting a 
rebalancing of inventory levels and uncertainty 
caused by the economic crisis in Europe.

Performance 

Underlying revenue for the year increased by 
4.9 per cent to £246.1 million excluding an adverse 
foreign exchange impact of 1.4 per cent. Operating 
profits significantly increased by 38.3 per cent to 
£14.8 million with the operating profit margin 
increasing to 6.1 per cent (2010: 4.6 per cent). 

Outlook

The continuing macroeconomic issues are creating 
some uncertainty and we expect our distributors 
to continue to reduce inventory levels in the first 
half of the year. However, this is offset by the 
strong fundamental growth drivers in our markets 
underpinning an increased demand for electronic 
components in the medium term. The investments 
we are making in operational improvements, and 
the increased pace of new product introductions, 
will underpin further improvements in performance 
and will begin to have a positive impact in the 
second half of the year.

30 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

Sensors

“ We have strong drivers in our end markets resulting in an increase 
in the use of sensors. In 2011 we strengthened our longstanding 
relationships with VW, Daimler and BMW, three leading worldwide 
automotive manufacturers. The globalisation of our business, 
our ability to respond quickly to opportunities and the significant 
business we have secured with leading customers in the automotive, 
truck, off-highway and industrial segments is extremely exciting.”

  Pat Murray Divisional Chief Executive – Sensors

Watch a video of Pat:
http://annualreports.
ttelectronics.com

The division provides sensing solutions for 
critical applications which require high levels 
of expertise, precision and reliability, often 
operating in extremely harsh environments. 
We are focused primarily on the transportation 
and industrial markets where our ability to 
meet these requirements helps our customers 
to compete and win. The division’s principal 
operations are in Germany, China and India 
supported by additional engineering and 
development teams in Eastern Europe and 
the UK. A new manufacturing operation has 
been established in Mexico to serve North 
and South America. 

Strategy

We provide sensors that form the heart of critical 
systems which improve safety, performance and 
emissions, helping our customers to be more 
competitive and address increasing levels of 
regulation and legislation. The division’s ability 
to deliver high performance micro electronic 
and mechanical solutions that work reliably first 
time, every time, in extremely harsh environments 
is a key differentiator. We are focused on sectors 
which are growing, that value our expertise and 
where the deployment of sensing technology 
is increasing to address new challenges. Target 
markets include transportation, industrial and 
medical. We are building long-term strategic 
partnerships with leading companies in each 
of these markets whilst investing in the further 
development of our geographic footprint to 
support them in all major regions. The division is 
embedding a culture of continuous improvement 
and using total business excellence to ensure 
common core processes and standards across 
all of its operations.

Progress

We made good progress in 2011 securing sensor 
projects on new vehicle platforms and increasing 
our market share. In addition we benefited from 
greater sensor content per vehicle. We achieved 
strategic wins with BMW, Daimler and VW. These 
included our nomination as a key sensor partner 
for VW’s latest global engine platform that will 
be manufactured in Germany, China and Mexico 
(see page 12 for more detail) and major new 
programmes with BMW for our innovative 
combi-sensor (providing precision pressure and 
temperature measurement in one smaller package).

We are responding quickly to global opportunities, 
actively transferring sensor expertise developed 
over many years in Germany and the UK to our 
teams in China, India and Mexico. These teams 
re-package our core technology, developing 
customised solutions for the local market. 
Growing our business in the Americas and Asia 
remains a key strategy and we secured wins with 
several of the leading Chinese manufacturers 
during the year, including JAC, Chery and BYD 
and continued to strengthen our relationship 
with Hero, Mahindra and Tata in India. It is also 
notable that a significant proportion of our 
European revenues are linked to exports by 
our customers to other regions, principally Asia. 

Another key strategy for the division is to modify 
our core automotive sensing technologies and 
re-package them for the broader transportation 
market (including truck, off-highway and rail) 
and selective industrial and medical applications. 
The investments we have made are beginning to 
deliver results, particularly in the transportation 
market where we increased revenue in 2011 to 
c£26 million, representing growth of 90 per cent.

£166.9m

£143.5m

£8.8m

£3.9m

5.3%

2.7%

£47.6m

£52.5m

1,108

1,069

Revenue

2011

2010

+14.9%*

Operating profit**

2011

2010

+125.6%

Operating profit margin**

2011

2010

+260 bps

Capital employed

2011

2010

-9.3%

Year end headcount

2011

2010

+3.6%

*   At constant exchange rates

** Before exceptional items

TT electronics plc 31   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

 Sensors continued

Progress (continued)

Markets

The global structure put in place in 2010 was 
strengthened during the year. The division’s 
Global Operations leader relocated from Germany 
to China, along with the key account manager for 
VW, reflecting the region’s importance, the need 
to be close to our customers and our growing 
global manufacturing presence. In addition we 
have established a new manufacturing centre 
in Mexico where we are on track to commence 
production in 2012. We will continue to strengthen 
the local and global management teams to enable 
further growth.

Our manufacturing operations continue to improve 
productivity, whilst ensuring consistent quality and 
on-time delivery across all sites, which is critical for 
our customers. We are implementing common 
processes, equipment and systems in all of our 
facilities so that we operate to one global standard. 
As part of this programme, in 2011 we selected five 
highly talented individuals to undergo black belt 
training and become experts in six sigma and lean 
techniques as we continue our drive for savings 
and continuous improvement. These individuals, 
along with the divisional leadership team, are 
championing the culture change necessary for 
us to be a best in class sensors business and 
remain the first choice for our customers.

The division’s principal competitors include 
divisions of Bosch, Continental, CTS and Hella.

The recovery in the automotive market seen in 
2010 continued in 2011 with particularly strong 
demand for premium passenger cars from 
emerging markets. Despite more modest growth 
in Western Europe and the US, our three largest 
automotive customers all had record years as the 
premium car market out-performed other sectors. 
The truck and off-highway segments also showed 
a good improvement in key regions.

Performance

The division has delivered an excellent 
performance during 2011. Underlying revenue 
for the year increased by 14.9 per cent, excluding 
a foreign exchange benefit of 1.4 per cent, 
and we grew sales in Europe, Asia and North 
America. Operating profit more than doubled 
to £8.8 million with the operating profit margin 
increasing to 5.3 per cent.

Outlook

Following the growth in 2011, demand in Western 
Europe for passenger cars is expected to reduce 
in 2012. The US, China and India are forecast to 
see good growth. We are very well positioned 
to capture new business worldwide, both with 
our major global customers who are growing 
their market share and with local manufacturers. 
In addition sensor deployment continues to 
increase driven by emissions regulations and a 
desire for greater safety, comfort and performance. 
Building on our progress in 2011, we are continuing 
to invest in our people and our global footprint as 
we secure new programmes that will come into 
volume production in 2013 and beyond. 

32 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Implementing global 
standards

With manufacturing facilities in Europe, Asia and North America, 
the Sensors division delivers products to customers from multiple 
locations. Business excellence and lean manufacturing are key  
to ensuring consistent quality and on time delivery across all  
sites - factors which are of critical importance to our customers.  
In 2012 the division will begin to manufacture and ship products 
to Daimler from its facility in China, supporting their global growth.

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 33   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

 IMS

Watch a video of John:
http://annualreports.
ttelectronics.com

“2011 was another strong year for the IMS division, building upon 
the foundations we put in place during 2010. I am particularly 
pleased that we have strengthened our position in key markets 
by further developing our relationships with major customers 
and with the step change in performance from our site in the UK. 
Our progress in 2011 positions us to deliver further improvements 
in performance in 2012.”

  John Molloy Divisional Chief Executive – IMS

Margins improved as we brought on new business 
and completed the transition of a number of 
projects to lower cost manufacturing regions. 
In addition, we saw a significant improvement 
in the profitability of our operation in the UK 
following the re-structuring completed in 2010.

The division’s principal competitors include ACW, 
CTS, EPIC, Neways and Plexus.

Markets

Strong customer demand at the end of 2010 
continued into 2011 in all of our markets. The 
natural disasters in Japan and Thailand resulted 
in an increase in demand in the second and third 
quarters as customers placed orders to secure 
supply for the rest of the year. Reflecting this, 
demand stabilised in the final quarter with 
customers looking to manage their year end 
inventory positions.

Performance

Underlying revenue for the year grew by 
9.7 per cent excluding a foreign exchange impact 
of 1.2 per cent. Progress made with our global 
customers underpinned this growth and led 
to an improvement in operating profit before 
exceptional items which increased to £5.1 million, 
delivering an operating profit margin of 
5.1 per cent. 

Outlook

Following a strong year in 2011, we expect to 
see limited growth in broader market demand 
in the first half of 2012 due to the ongoing 
macroeconomic issues. However, we are 
focused on specific segments that have good 
fundamental growth drivers and on further 
developing our position with key customers.

Revenue

2011

2010

+9.7%*

Operating profit**

2011

2010

+24.4%

Operating profit margin**

2011

2010

+70 bps

Capital employed

2011

2010

+7.8%

Year end headcount

2011

2010

+5.9%

£100.0m

£92.2m

£5.1m

£4.1m

5.1%

4.4%

£23.5m

£21.8m

1,133

1,070

*  At constant exchange rates 

**  Before exceptional items

    All 2010 comparatives restated for  

inclusion of Abtest Limited

The division draws on its design engineering 
capabilities, flexibility and world-class 
facilities to provide high quality electronic 
manufacturing support to customers in the 
defence and aerospace, medical and premium 
industrial sectors. The business has a broad 
capability from board assembly to full systems 
integration focused on higher mix, lower 
volume business.

The division supports its customers from 
manufacturing operations in China, USA, 
UK and Malaysia.

Strategy

The division’s strategy is to work with customers 
who are looking for a partner to build their more 
complex electronic and electromechanical 
products and who value our ability to provide 
support, not only throughout the product lifecycle 
but also across multiple geographic regions. Our 
global presence, combined with local engineering 
and customer service is a key differentiator against 
our regional competitors.

Progress 

During the year our continued focus on key markets 
and accounts, combined with investments in our 
sales team, resulted in significant new contract 
wins. In addition to increasing our revenue with 
many of our major customers, we were particularly 
pleased to secure a new global customer, 
Meggitt PLC, bringing significant business for 
all of our sites (see page 13 for further detail). 

We successfully managed the supply chain 
challenges that arose following the Japanese 
tsunami and the flooding in Thailand. Our 
procurement teams worked hard with our 
suppliers, quickly securing the parts required to 
maintain supply to our customers. Based on our 
responsiveness and performance, a number of 
customers have awarded us additional business. 

Quality remains a key focus and, in June, our facility 
in China obtained the NADCAP standard which is 
widely recognised as the leading quality standard 
in the aerospace industry. This accreditation is now 
being replicated at our other sites. 

34 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
Supporting our 
customer’s growth

When a major US instrumentation company wanted to 
manufacture product in China for the medical market, they 
decided to build on a trusted and established relationship. The 
IMS division was already supporting them in the UK and because 
of its global footprint was the natural partner. Working closely 
with the customer, the division developed a local supply chain 
for components, re-engineered certain elements of the design 
to reduce cost and invested in additional capabilities. As a result, 
TT was awarded significant business and is positioned to support 
the customer globally on additional new projects in 2012.

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 35   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Delivering market leading 
secure power solutions

The new “Secure Power Series” product range was developed 
specifically for the rental and urgent power markets providing 
higher power in a limited footprint, combined with reduced noise 
and emissions. The product delivered strong sales in 2011 and 
generated significant interest at the recent Middle East Electricity 
show in Dubai. 

36 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

 Secure Power

“ Following a difficult first six months in Mexico and Latin America 
we finished the year strongly with a good order book for 2012. 
New products introduced in 2011 and our increasing presence in 
key export markets provide a strong platform as we go into 2012.” 

Watch a video of Nigel:
http://annualreports.
ttelectronics.com

Nigel Brice Divisional Chief Executive – Secure Power

The division provides secure power solutions 
including generating sets, uninterruptible 
power supplies and service and support to 
a wide variety of global industries which 
require reliable consistent power. Utilising 
its engineering capability, the division offers 
bespoke turnkey solutions for major one-off 
projects and differentiated medium to high 
power generating sets with a focus on quality, 
reliability and service.

The division has two principal operations: 
Ottomotores in Mexico and Dale Power 
Solutions in the UK. In addition, it has a 
facility in Brazil and sales and service 
offices in Scotland and the UAE.

the launch of the new containerised Secure 
Power Series product range in late 2010, winning 
a number of major orders in the UK and Middle 
East. This is a portable product designed primarily 
for the growing rental market where the ability 
to deliver higher power in a limited footprint, 
combined with reduced noise and emissions, 
is critical. Additionally, further investment was 
made in developing export sales channels and 
there was a significant increase in the number of 
orders received for the commercial UPS product 
range first introduced in 2010.

The division’s principal competitors include 
Broadcrown, Caterpillar (including FG Wilson), 
Chloride and IGSA. 

Strategy

Markets

The division is focused on providing secure power 
solutions to industries which face significant 
economic loss from any disruption in their power 
supply including the petrochemical, utilities and 
financial services sectors. The business is expanding 
in Latin America and the Middle East through 
investment in the sales organisation and the 
development of new distributor relationships to 
take advantage of increasing requirements for 
standby and continuous power. In addition, the 
division is continuing to improve its product range 
with a specific emphasis on solutions targeting the 
growing number of rental providers and higher 
power opportunities.

Progress 

Ottomotores made solid progress during 2011. 
A new mid power canopied range of generating 
sets was introduced with a number of orders 
secured, including two for customers in Kuwait 
and Brazil each worth c£1 million. In addition, 
a major project was delivered in Venezuela for 
a “mini power plant”, reflecting a trend towards 
utilities and industrial plant developers using 
banks of mid to high power gensets to deliver 
large amounts of power in place of supply from 
the grid. The business strengthened its distributor 
and dealer network in Venezuela, Guatemala, 
Ecuador and Chile and made good progress 
in Brazil where we commenced local product 
assembly. Dale saw significant success following 

The Latin American markets, including Mexico, 
were difficult in the first half of the year with 
many customers delaying major capital projects. 
However, we experienced a significant improvement 
in demand in the second half with a very strong 
final quarter in terms of both orders and sales. 
Markets in the UK and Middle East performed well.

Performance

Following a 44.2 per cent increase in full year 
revenue in 2010, underlying revenue for 2011 
reduced by 2.3 per cent to £83.2 million excluding 
an adverse foreign exchange impact of 1.8 per cent. 
Operating profits reduced broadly in line with 
revenue to £5.5 million, delivering an operating 
profit margin of 6.7 per cent.

Outlook

We anticipate good levels of demand from key 
export markets in Latin America, the Middle East 
and North Africa whilst the UK and Europe are 
expected to continue to be impacted by ongoing 
uncertainty in the eurozone. The division normally 
experiences some seasonality in demand with a 
stronger second half year and we expect this to be 
the case in the current year. Investments in sales 
channels, the extension of the product range and 
the success of the Secure Power Series position 
the division well for 2012. 

£81.7m

£85.2m

£5.5m

£6.2m

6.7%

7.3%

£22.0m

£15.1m

730

757

Revenue

2011

2010

-2.3%*

Operating profit

2011

2010

-11.3%

Operating profit margin

2011

2010

-60 bps

Capital employed

2011

2010

+45.7%

Year end headcount

2011

2010

-3.6%

* At constant exchange rates

TT electronics plc 37   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

 Financial review

Measuring our performance

The Group has a clear strategy to improve 
performance and deliver shareholder value. 
Key financial performance indicators were 
identified in the 2009 Annual Report and these 
are used to monitor progress. Organic revenue 
growth from continuing operations for 2011 
compared to 2010 was 7.2 per cent against the 
overall target of mid to high single digit growth. 
The improvement in the Group operating margin 
to 5.8 per cent represents progress towards 
the goal of 8 to 10 per cent. The Components, 
Sensors and IMS divisions all made excellent 
progress towards their respective operating margin 
targets, while the operating profit margin in the 
Secure Power division declined slightly in the year. 
We remain on course to achieve the overall target 
margin for the Group of 8 per cent as we exit 2013. 
Both earnings per share growth and operating 
cash flow conversion exceeded the targets set 
whilst the relative total shareholder return was 
broadly in line with the target level. 

Revenue from continuing operations increased 
by 7.2 per cent to £595.4 million in 2011 at constant 
exchange rates, and operating profit before 
exceptional items increased to £34.2 million. Profit 
before tax and exceptional items was £29.5 million, 
an increase of 43.2 per cent compared to 2010. 

Exceptional items

The Group reports non-trading income or 
expenditure as exceptional when the size, 
nature or function of an item or aggregation 
of similar items is such that separate presentation 
is relevant to an understanding of its financial 
position. An exceptional credit of £2.3 million from 
continuing operations has been recognised during 
2011, compared with an exceptional credit of 
£4.5 million for 2010. The make up is shown below:

£million

2011

2010

Reduction in UK pension liabilities

Restructuring costs
Pension curtailment gain from 
scheme closure 
Profit on sale of property interest
Onerous property leases
Total

7.5

(5.2)

–
–
–
2.3

–

–

4.3
1.0
(0.8)
4.5

Following the UK Government’s announcement 
in 2010 to change the basis of indexation of 
occupational pension schemes from the Retail 
Price Index (RPI) to the Consumer Price Index (CPI), 
the Group has recognised a one-off reduction in 
the future liabilities of the UK pension scheme 
of £7.5 million. Restructuring costs principally 
include the costs associated with the closure of 
the Components facility in Boone, North Carolina.

Net finance costs

Net finance costs for 2011 were £4.7 million 
compared to £4.3 million in 2010. Included within 
this amount is £1.0 million in respect of the net 
interest expense arising on pension scheme 
liabilities (2010: £0.5 million) primarily due to a 
reduction in the discount rate, £0.6 million 
(2010: £0.6 million) in respect of the amortisation 
of loan arrangement fees associated with the 
re-financing undertaken in May 2010 and 
£0.7 million (2010: £0.4 million) in respect of 
the interest expense on a minority put/call 
option relating to a third party minority interest 
in one of the Group’s subsidiaries.

Taxation

The tax charge for the year was £7.3 million 
(2010: £6.7 million), which represents an effective 
tax rate of 30.2 per cent on continuing operations 
excluding exceptional items (2010: 32.4 per cent). 
The charge arises from the profits generated in 
overseas countries, in particular in USA, Mexico, 
China and India. There is a minimal level of tax 
payable in the UK and Germany due to the 
availability of tax losses.

Earnings per share and dividends

Headline earnings per share from continuing 
operations were 13.3 pence which represents 
an increase of 47.8 per cent over the 2010 figure. 
Basic earnings per share from continuing 
operations were 15.8 pence (2010: 11.9 pence).

The Directors recommend a final dividend of 
3.2 pence which together with the interim 
dividend of 1.2 pence gives a total dividend for 
the year of 4.4 pence per share (2010: 2.8 pence), 
an increase of 57 per cent. This is in line with the 
Group’s policy of increasing dividends progressively 
whilst maintaining cover of at least two times 
underlying earnings per share. The final dividend 
will be paid on 8 June 2012 to shareholders on the 
register at 25 May 2012.

38 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
Discontinued operations

Cash flow, borrowings and facilities

In July 2011, the Group disposed of AEI Compounds 
Limited, the last business remaining within the 
former General Industrial division, for £8.6 million in 
cash before costs. This business has been classified 
as a discontinued operation in the Consolidated 
income statement. Discontinued operations for 
2010 comprised AEI Compounds Limited and the 
other General Industrial businesses which were 
sold during that year.

Pensions

The Group operates one significant defined benefit 
scheme in the UK and two overseas defined 
benefit schemes in the USA and Japan. All of these 
schemes are closed to new members and the 
UK and USA schemes were closed to future 
accrual during 2010. 

The assets and liabilities of the Group’s defined 
benefit schemes are summarised below:

£million

2011

2010

Fair value of assets
Liabilities
Deficit – UK scheme
Overseas schemes
Total Group deficit

373.4
(405.5)
(32.1)
(3.4)
(35.5)

333.9
(372.5)
(38.6)
(2.6)
(41.2)

As noted above, during 2011 there was a one-off 
reduction in the future liabilities of the UK scheme 
of £7.5 million arising from the UK Government’s 
change to using CPI rather than RPI.

The triennial valuation of the UK scheme as at 
April 2010 showed a deficit of £39.8 million. 
A funding agreement is in place with the Trustee 
fixing deficit contributions at £3.5 million in 
2011 and increasing by £0.2 million each year to 
£4.5 million in 2016. In addition, the Company has 
agreed to set aside £1.0 million per year for the 
next three years to be utilised in agreement with 
the Trustee for reducing the long-term liabilities 
of the scheme.

Excellent progress has been made in reducing 
net debt levels. The Group moved into a net 
cash position of £15.2 million at the end of 2011, 
compared with a net debt balance of £9.9 million 
at the end of 2010, and £113.2 million at the end 
of 2008.

£million (unless otherwise stated)
Underlying operating cash flow
Working capital improvement
Capital expenditure 
(including software)
Exceptional restructuring costs
Proceeds from disposal 
of businesses
Net cash/(debt)
Stock turns (times)
Debtor days
Creditor days

2011
63.0
5.4

2010
60.2
5.0

(21.6)
(2.2)

(12.2)
(5.0)

8.3
15.2
5.7
42
53

21.7
(9.9)
5.7
44
55

Underlying operating cash flow for the year was 
£63.0 million compared with £60.2 million in 2010. 
This increase was as a result of the improvement in 
profitability and the continued focus on managing 
working capital, which reduced by a further 
£5.4 million in 2011, following reductions made 
in the prior two years. The divisions successfully 
managed the impact of the increase in inventory 
levels following the Japanese earthquake and the 
Thailand floods, and the adverse working capital 
cash flow impact at the half year was reversed by 
year end. As a percentage of sales, trade working 
capital was a healthy 16 per cent compared with 
17 per cent at December 2010 demonstrating our 
commitment to managing working capital levels. 
Conversion of operating profit to operating cash 
flow after capital expenditure was 106 per cent, 
exceeding the target of 100 per cent conversion.

There was an increase in cash generated from 
operations of 10.2 per cent to £57.3 million after 
exceptional restructuring cash costs of £2.2 million 
and a £3.5 million special payment to the UK 
pension fund.

TT electronics plc 39   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

 Financial review continued

Cash flow, borrowings and facilities (continued)

Capital expenditure (including software) increased 
to £21.6 million compared with depreciation of 
£16.9 million as divisions increased investment 
levels. Proceeds from the sale of AEI Compounds 
Limited and the receipt of deferred consideration 
from previous disposals amounted to £8.3 million. 
Net cash flow for the year was £25.8 million 
(2010: £46.6 million).

The Group has in place a committed facility of 
£60 million to May 2013 with a club of four banks 
comprising HSBC, The Royal Bank of Scotland, 
Santander and Fifth Third Bank of the USA. 
This facility is made up of a term loan amount 
of £40 million and a revolving credit facility of 
£20 million. At 31 December 2011, the term loan 
was fully drawn down and the revolving credit 
facility was undrawn. During the year a £10 million 
loan from one of the club banks was repaid. The 
club facility, together with other bilateral term loans 
and working capital lines, give the Group facilities 
of over £100 million, which are adequate for the 
foreseeable future.

The main financial covenants in the £60 million 
club facility restrict net debt to be below two 
times EBITDA before exceptional items. In addition, 
EBITDA before exceptional items is required 
to cover net finance charges by 6.25 times, 
increasing to 6.5 times in the final year of the facility. 
The covenants are tested quarterly on a rolling 
12-month basis and were satisfied comfortably 
at 31 December 2011:

Covenant

December 
20111

Net debt/EBITDA before 
exceptional items
EBITDA before exceptional items/
net finance charges 

<2.0

(0.3)

>6.25

16.0

1   based on EBITDA and net finance charges for year ended 

31 December 2011

The Directors have assessed the future funding 
requirements of the Group and compared them 
with the level of available borrowing facilities and 
are satisfied that the Group has adequate resources 
for the foreseeable future.

40 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

 Principal risks and risk management process

As a multinational business, operating in diverse industrial markets 
and jurisdictions, the Group is exposed to a number of potential risks 
which may have a material effect on its reputation and financial or 
operational performance. The Board has overall responsibility for risk 
management and internal controls, supported by the Risk Committee 
and the Audit Committee.

The Risk Committee, chaired by the Group Chief Executive, holds 
regular meetings to review risks and assess and monitor actions 
to mitigate them. This provides a framework for managing risk 
throughout the Group. Risk identification and evaluation, including 
the nature, likelihood and materiality of the risks affecting each Group 
business, is owned and assessed by management and reviewed 
periodically. On the basis of these assessments, the Risk Committee 
produces a Group Risk Register and a Group Risk Map which identifies 
and categorises risks (based on the likelihood of their occurrence and 
their potential impact on the Group) together with management 
actions to address and mitigate them. Minutes of the Risk Committee 
meetings, together with the Group Risk Register and Group Risk Map, 
are circulated to the Board and to the Audit Committee.

It should be recognised that risk management and internal controls 
can only provide reasonable and not absolute protection against risk, 
material misstatement or loss. 

KPMG Audit Plc were engaged to undertake a comprehensive 
assessment of the Group’s risk management processes and internal 
audit function during 2011. The processes and structure were 
reviewed in order to identify areas for improvement which would 
build on the progress made over recent years. This was achieved 
by means of a desktop review of risk management and internal 
audit documentation; structured interviews with key stakeholders; 
assessment of where risk management and internal audit is 
positioned against stakeholders’ expectations and review against 
KPMG’s knowledge base of leading practices. The results of 
these assessments were then benchmarked against KPMG’s 
Risk Management Maturity Framework, leading practices and 
standards set by the Institute of Internal Audit.

The Group’s risk management processes were assessed as being at 
a level of maturity typical of many FTSE 250 companies. Key strengths 
identified included a strong “tone at the top” and an active Group 
level Risk Committee. However areas for improvement at divisional 
and site level were also highlighted. In order to reach a more mature 
state, changes to the Group’s risk management organisational 
structure and the formalisation of risk management processes, 
including roles and responsibilities were recommended.

Opportunities for improvements in the effectiveness of the 
Group’s internal audit department were also identified and KPMG’s 
recommendation was that a review of the structure, approach and 
reporting lines of the internal audit department be undertaken. 

In light of these recommendations and following a review of the 
risk management processes and internal audit function, recruitment 
began for a new combined role of Group Head of Risk and Assurance, 
reporting to the Group Chief Executive. The new appointee, Per-Olof 
Ahlstrom, joined the Group in January 2012 and has been appointed 
to the Operating Board and the Risk Committee, with responsibility 
for developing risk and compliance frameworks, developing risk 
detection, assessment and mitigation strategies, and working closely 
with the businesses to ensure that risk management is fully 
embedded across the Group.

Further details of the Group’s system of internal controls are contained 
in the Directors’ report on corporate governance on pages 51 to 56.

Additional risk mitigation and related initiatives undertaken during 
2011 included the implementation of a Group-wide training and 
compliance programme, training seminars conducted within each 
division, the risk assessment of suppliers and business partners, the 
introduction of revised ethics and compliance policies and a new, 
multi-lingual, anonymous whistleblowing procedure maintained 
by an external third party provider. In addition, specific legal and 
product liability risk training for key members of staff involved in 
providing sensors and components to the automotive industry was 
carried out in conjunction with Allianz, the Group’s product liability 
insurer, at its technical centre in Munich. 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 41   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

 Principal risks and risk management process continued

The Risk Committee reviews risks and assesses and monitors actions to mitigate them. 
The risks outlined below are those the Group believes are the principal and material 
risks. The risks are listed in priority order within each area of risk based upon their 
current relevance to our business. It should be noted that additional risks the Group 
does not consider material, or of which it is not aware, could have an adverse impact.

Area of risk

Potential impact

Mitigation

Markets and customers

Economic downturn

General economic downturn leading to reduction 
in customer demand and production volumes.

•  Forward-looking indicators are regularly reviewed 

to identify deteriorating market conditions.

Erosion of customer base

The Group operates in a highly competitive global 
market and could face a significant erosion of its 
existing customer base as a result of competition, 
customer relocation or a reduction in end user demand. 

Operations

Product warranty

The Group manufactures products that often operate 
in extreme environments where a serious incident 
arising from failure could result in liabilities for personal 
injury and damage to reputation, particularly in the 
automotive sector which represented 35 per cent 
of Group revenue in 2011.

IT delivery

The Group and operational management depend on 
timely and reliable information from software systems. 
A large SAP implementation across the Group is in 
progress. A major failure in the delivery of the SAP or 
other IT projects on time and on budget could delay 
or impact decision making or service to our customers.

•  Management structures are in place to enable 
a rapid response to changing circumstances.

•  The composition of the customer base is reviewed 
as part of the annual strategic planning process. 
Plans are established and monitored to diversify it. 

•  The key account management programme 

ensures that major customers are dealt within a 
co-ordinated manner globally. Regular reviews are 
held with them to assess performance and identify 
areas for improvement.

•  Regular feedback from customers is used to drive 

improvements in performance.

• 

Improvements in product development roadmaps 
ensure that the Group retains and increases its 
competitive advantage.

•  Comprehensive quality control procedures and 
rigorous product testing are backed up by an 
appropriate level of insurance. 

•  Processes are in place to audit key suppliers 

and monitor the quality of materials received.

•  Major contracts are reviewed by the Group General 
Counsel and we work continuously to build and 
maintain relationships with all key stakeholders. 

•  Group guidelines on acceptable levels of contractual 
liability are reinforced by legal risk training seminars, 
specific to each division’s business needs.

•  The Group’s IT Steering Committee meets on 

a monthly basis to review the SAP implementation 
and all other major IT projects. 

•  The Committee is chaired by the Group Chief 

Executive and members include the Group Finance 
Director, Group Business Development Director, 
the Group IT Director and certain Divisional 
Chief Executives.

•  The Group only sources hardware and software 
from reputable manufacturers and suppliers and 
has appropriate disaster recovery plans in place.

42 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Area of risk

Potential impact

Mitigation

Operations (continued)
Transformation programme

The Group is going through a transformational 
programme to improve competitive advantage and 
be more responsive to customers’ requirements. This is 
being achieved by consolidating manufacturing sites, 
implementing common IT solutions and streamlining 
processes. For example, the Group is closing a site 
in Boone, North Carolina, transferring business and 
product lines to Mexicali, Mexico. Risks associated with 
such large scale transformation include disruption to 
the customer base, anticipated benefits not being 
realised and the loss of key individuals.

•  Strong change management and operational 
controls with professional project managers 
recruited to oversee major programmes. 

•  Regular project reviews by the senior 

management team.

•  Close communication with key customers to 

explain the actions being taken and to understand 
and address their concerns. 

•  Regular talent and performance reviews, supported 
by monitoring and communication with employees.

Business interruption

Inability to fulfil customer orders resulting in lost sales 
and reputational damage with a consequential impact 
on revenue and profit.

•  The spread of businesses offers good protection 

from individual events. 

•  Robust business continuity plans are tested 
periodically to manage the risk of the loss of 
a major facility.

Supply chain costs

Reliance on suppliers for key commodities, materials 
and components, some of which may be available from 
a limited number of sources. There is a risk of substantial 
increases in supplier costs driven by commodity pricing. 

•  The Group purchasing team co-ordinates activities 
across the Components, Sensors and IMS divisions 
through the Group Purchasing Steering Committee 
which meets monthly.

Acquisitions

The Group may pursue acquisitions as part of its overall 
growth strategy. Such acquisitions may not realise 
expected benefits.

•  Key material pricing trends are tracked to ensure 

increases are passed on to customers where possible.

•  An active programme to improve low cost sourcing.

•  Use of commodity price hedging, taking into 

account the forecast volume of purchases, forward 
commodity prices and the cost of taking out cover.

•  Performing robust due diligence.

•  Obtaining representation, warranties and indemnities 

from vendors where possible. 

• 

Implementing business integration processes.

Laws and regulations

Compliance

Finance

Financial risks

The Group operates in a large number of jurisdictions 
and, as a consequence, is subject to numerous 
domestic and international regulations. These 
include laws and regulations covering export control, 
anti-bribery and competition. Failure to comply could 
result in civil or criminal liabilities leading to significant 
fines and penalties or restrictions being placed upon 
the Group’s ability to trade resulting in reduced sales 
and profitability, and reputational damage.

•  Robust policy and control framework in place. 

•  Cross-division export compliance group formed, 
led by the Group General Counsel, supported by 
external advisers as required.

•  Comprehensive anti-bribery programme introduced 
including an employee declaration supported by 
online and site specific training.

•  Audit programmes and clear policies issued to 

all employees. 

The major financial risks faced by the Group are: foreign 
exchange risk, interest rate risk, credit risk, liquidity risk 
and commodity price risk. Significant fluctuations in 
foreign exchange rates, interest rates or commodity 
prices could have a material adverse impact on the 
Group’s results and financial position if not managed 
appropriately. The global nature of the Group’s business 
means that it is exposed to financial risks in multiple 
jurisdictions. The Group is increasing its presence in 
emerging regions where systems of financial controls 
may be less developed.

•  The main financial risks are managed by the Group’s 
Treasury department in close liaison with the Group’s 
business divisions and operating companies, under 
the oversight of a Treasury Committee chaired by the 
Group Finance Director. 

•  The responsibilities of the Group’s Treasury 

department include management of cash resources, 
debt and capital structure, approval of counterparties 
and relevant transaction limits and oversight of all 
significant treasury activities.

TT electronics plc 43   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Progress in 2011

 Corporate responsibility

We manage our business responsibly and 
sustainably in accordance with the diverse 
expectations of our global stakeholders.  
We understand corporate responsibility  
(CR) as a dynamic discipline to manage risk  
and maximise opportunities in an ever 
changing world.

We take our corporate responsibility seriously 
across the Group as an employer, manufacturer, 
investor and consumer. We are committed to 
understanding, monitoring and managing our 
social, environmental and economic impact to 
enable us to contribute to society’s wider goal of 
sustainable development. We aim to demonstrate 
these responsibilities through our actions and 
within our corporate policies.

The Corporate and Social Responsibility 
Committee, chaired by the Group Chief Executive, 
is responsible for defining our strategic CR priorities, 
monitoring our CR performance and ensuring that 
our CR activity remains directly related to our 
overall business objectives. This report highlights 
some of the activities undertaken in key areas.

Our workplace

We believe that the people working at 
TT electronics are our key asset. Creating a 
good working environment at all of our locations 
is of paramount importance. We strive to build 
a supportive, diverse and engaging workplace, 
whilst nurturing a high performance corporate 
culture, built around our core values (set out 
on pages 18 and 19). 

We employ more than 6,000 people globally 
and will continue to invest in their training and 
development. We strongly believe in equipping 
our people with the skills to do their jobs 
effectively, encouraging them to develop to their 
full potential. TT electronics provides a variety of 
tailored training and development opportunities. 
For example, in 2011, the Sensors division 
continued its six sigma training programme 
with five employees achieving black belt status.

Managers and employees alike are encouraged 
to promote and live our corporate values, 
collectively making our people feel proud to be 
part of our organisation. In 2011, we successfully 
launched our global recognition programme 
“Inspire”, acknowledging individual and team 
contributions through monthly recognition 
awards, quarterly exceptional awards and 
bi-annual Chief Executive awards.

Actively encouraging open communication 
throughout the workplace assists in developing 
a culture where inclusion, diversity and flexible 
working practices are the norm. During the year 
we improved the way we communicate with our 
employees, formalising quarterly management 
briefings to share and discuss business critical 
information directly with them. In addition, regular 
face to face briefings are taking place at a local level 
throughout the Group.

The Group is committed to providing a safe 
working environment for all employees.  
We made significant progress during 2011 to create 
a working environment that supports the health, 
safety and well-being of our people and we have 
seen a 40 per cent reduction in the number of 
three day workplace accidents compared to 2010.

All our global employees were recently invited to 
complete our second employee survey to gather 
views on what it is like to work for TT electronics. 
Survey questions relate to a wide range of topics 
and results are analysed by each business unit and 
shared by all managers with their teams. During 
2011, a number of actions were taken based on the 
results of our first survey including encouraging 
further engagement with the local communities 
in which we operate, enhancing our learning 
and development offerings and a greater focus 
on rewarding achievements. 

We reviewed our whistleblowing policy during the 
year in light of legislative changes and more than 
600 employees also undertook mandatory training 
and assessment relating to the UK Bribery Act. 

Our marketplace

We work closely with our customers, treating 
them with respect whilst ensuring we maintain 
the highest ethical standards. To this end 
we have launched a global, multi-lingual 
Ethics and Integrity Helpline. 

By acting with integrity and fairness, we seek 
to be a business partner that customers choose 
to work with. In turn, we require our own supply 
chain to ensure that their employees operate in 
a safe environment. The Group is a member of 
the Electronic Industry Citizenship Coalition (EICC) 
and follows its Code of Conduct. During 2012 
we will focus on improving how we monitor 
and manage our supply chain. We adhere 
to appropriate values, ethics, standards and 
behaviours even in areas where laws or standards 
are inadequate or absent, ensuring that we meet 
the needs of all stakeholders. 

44 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Our marketplace (continued)

Products highlighted by the auditor included:

Ensuring that we provide a world-class service to 
our customers is essential to the continued growth 
of our business. Each division has its own set of 
quality and performance measures which are 
monitored on a monthly basis. We undertake 
regular reviews with all our key customers to 
gather clear feedback on our performance.

Our environment

We are all responsible for the preservation of 
the natural environment. For TT, this means 
managing our operations to minimise our impact 
on the environment. In 2011 we made progress 
mitigating the impact of climate change by 
reducing greenhouse gas emissions from energy 
use, transportation and everyday processes. 
We attained the Carbon Trust Standard for our 
UK operations and delivered an 8.6 per cent 
reduction per annum in our UK carbon footprint 
in the period from 2008 to 2010 (equivalent to 
a reduction of c3,000 tonnes of carbon per year 
on an ongoing basis). The auditor was particularly 
impressed with the breadth of products designed 
and manufactured in the UK that contribute to 
carbon reduction and the new web-based system 
for measuring energy reduction that is now in use 
at each of our UK sites.

•  Sensors that assist start stop technology for 

Audi and Fiat

•  Lower energy processes for resistive ink manufacture

•  Electronic components for smart meters

•  UPS solutions for windfarm monitoring equipment 

During 2012 we will continue to focus on further 
reducing our carbon emissions across the Group.

Our community

As an organisation we believe that it is our 
responsibility to ensure that our activities 
support strong, thriving and diverse communities 
around the world. We aim to make a distinctive 
contribution to equality and social development 
by establishing effective partnerships and 
programmes that make best use of the energies 
and skills of our employees. We support our 
employees in fundraising for charities and 
voluntary work, recognising both the benefit to 
the community and to the employees themselves.

During 2011, we actively encouraged 
employees to become involved in worthwhile 
community activities, in partnership with 
community organisations.

1

3

2

4

1
BI Technologies 
– Malaysia 
celebrating 
1,000,000 accident 
free hours.

2
In January 2011 
the Sensors division 
introduced TTotal 
Business Excellence 
focused on six 
sigma and lean 
manufacturing.

3
Congratulations to 
everyone involved 
in achieving a 
17% reduction 
in our carbon 
footprint across 
the UK business.

4
“Go Yellow” 
charity days at TT’s 
UK companies 
in support of 
Help the Hospices.

TT electronics plc 45   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Section header

Introduction

Governance

Introduction by the Chairman
 Board of Directors and Company Secretary

In this section
47 
48 
50  Operating Board
51  Corporate Governance
57  Nominations Committee
58  Audit Committee
60  Remuneration report
67  Other statutory disclosures

46 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 Directors’ report – Governance

 Introduction by the Chairman

“I am pleased with the progress we have made embedding 
our core values, principles and ethics throughout the 
business to ensure that all employees understand, and 
adhere to, the behaviours expected of them in their 
day to day activities.”

Effective succession planning is key if the Board and 
its committees are to have the appropriate balance 
of skills, experience, independence and knowledge 
to enable them to effectively discharge their duties 
and responsibilities. I am delighted with the 
appointment of Stephen King as a non-executive 
Director, strengthening the Board and bringing 
additional finance experience and an in depth 
knowledge of global manufacturing businesses. 

The achievement of good governance requires 
focus and commitment. As we continue to build 
on the progress made in recent years I am confident 
that we are encouraging the correct behaviours 
across the Group to effectively support a highly 
sustainable, successful and respected business.

Sean Watson Chairman

The application of the principles of good corporate 
governance: accountability, transparency, probity 
and focus is critical to the continued success of 
the Group. High quality governance requires that 
core values, principles and ethics are encouraged 
throughout the business to ensure that all 
employees understand, and adhere to, the 
behaviours expected of them in their day to day 
activities. We have clearly defined values that 
provide a framework within which we expect all 
of our employees to operate and which guide how 
we manage the business. I am pleased with the 
progress that we have made in 2011 embedding 
these values across the organisation.

The effectiveness of the Board is one of my 
principal priorities and we made further 
improvements in 2011. The Board has been actively 
engaged with the Group’s business, meeting with 
many members of the senior management team 
in formal and informal settings. In addition, Board 
members undertook an active programme of site 
visits and we held our first Board meeting at our 
facility in China, reflecting the importance of the 
region. The Board evaluation process continues 
to mature, with increased transparency and the 
honest and open expression of feedback actively 
encouraged. We will continue to strive to ensure 
that the Board is well informed, engaged and free 
to openly express views and concerns. 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 47   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Governance

 Board of Directors and Company Secretary

1

2

4

3

5

1. Sean Watson (63)
Chairman
Committees:
Nominations (Chairman)
Corporate Governance (Chairman)
Remuneration
Joined TT: 2007 as an independent 
non-executive Director. Chairman since 
May 2010.
Experience: A partner and former Head of 
Corporate Finance with CMS Cameron McKenna 
LLP. Was a non-executive Director of Informa plc 
from 2000 to 2009.

2. Geraint Anderson (52)
Group Chief Executive
Committees:
Corporate and Social Responsibility (Chairman)
Risk (Chairman)
Joined TT: 2008
Experience: Previously Vice President and 
General Manager of the Worldwide Service 
Provider Organisation for Linksys, a division 
of Cisco Systems, Inc.

3. Shatish Dasani (50)
Group Finance Director
Committees:
Corporate Governance
Risk
Joined TT: 2008
Experience: A Chartered Accountant, 
previously with De La Rue plc, Lafarge SA and 
Blue Circle Industries plc. Was also previously 
a non-executive director of Camelot plc.

4. Tim Roberts (41)
Group Business Development Director
Committees:
Corporate Governance
Joined TT: 2008. Appointed to the Board 
in January 2010.
Experience: Previously Strategy and 
Business Development Director with Spirent 
Communications plc and formerly a solicitor 
specialising in corporate finance.

5. David Crowther (66)
Senior Independent Non-executive Director
Committees:
Audit (Chairman*)
Nominations
Remuneration
Corporate Governance
Joined TT: 2005
Experience: A Chartered Accountant who was 
a senior partner with PricewaterhouseCoopers 
LLP. A non-executive Board Member and 
chairman of the Audit Committee of the Treasury 
Solicitor’s Department. Previously a member of 
the Professional Oversight Board, a part of the 
Financial Reporting Council, and a non-executive 
director of the Financial Ombudsman Service.

48 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

*  Stephen King will succeed David Crowther as Chairman 

of the Audit Committee upon David Crowther’s retirement 
at the conclusion of the 2012 Annual General Meeting

6

8

7

9

7. Stephen King (51)
Independent Non-executive Director
Committees:
Audit
Nominations
Joined TT: 24 October 2011
Experience: Currently Group Finance Director 
of Caledonia Investments plc; non-executive 
Director and chairman of the Audit Committee 
of The Weir Group plc; and member of the 
Board of Bristow Group Inc. Group finance 
director of De La Rue plc from 2003 to 2009 
and, prior to that, finance director of Aquila 
Networks plc (formerly Midlands Electricity plc). 
A Chartered Accountant, Stephen has also held 
senior financial positions in Lucas Industries plc 
and Seeboard plc and was also a non-executive 
director of Camelot plc from 2008 to 2009.

9. Wendy Sharp (46)
Group Company Secretary
Committees:
Corporate Governance
Joined TT: 1996. Appointed Group Company 
Secretary in 2007.

6. Michael Baunton CBE (61)
Independent Non-executive Director
Committees:
Audit
Nominations
Joined TT: 2010
Experience: Currently Chairman of the 
Board of the Society of Motor Manufacturers 
and Traders Limited’s Industry Forum and a 
non-executive Director of ACAL Energy Ltd. 
Awarded a CBE in 2004 for services to the 
automotive and engineering industries in the 
UK. Previously held senior executive roles with 
companies including Caterpillar Inc, Perkins 
Engines Company Limited and Tenneco Inc.

8. John Shakeshaft (57)
Independent Non-executive Director
Committees:
Remuneration (Chairman)
Audit
Nominations
Corporate and Social Responsibility
Joined TT: 2007
Experience: Currently chairman of Ludgate 
Environmental Fund Limited; deputy chairman 
and chair of the Audit Committee of The 
Economy Bank NV; chair of the Investment 
Committee of Corestone, AG; director and 
chair of the Audit Committee of both Tele2 
AB and Xebec Adsorption, Inc.. Director of 
Valiance Investment Funds. External member 
and chair of the Audit Committee of the 
Council of Cambridge University. Formerly a 
Managing Director at ABN AMRO and Lazard 
Brothers, having held senior positions within 
Barings, Morgan Stanley and Morgan Grenfell. 
Joined the City in 1986 following a number 
of overseas postings with HM Foreign and 
Commonwealth Office.

TT electronics plc 49   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Governance

 Operating Board

1

4

2

5

7

3

6

3. John Molloy (48) 
Divisional Chief Executive – IMS 
Joined TT: 2005 
Experience: Joined the Group when it 
acquired Dage (a business which now forms 
part of the IMS division) where he had been 
working in senior management roles for six 
years, primarily in Asia. Previously held senior 
management positions with electronics 
companies and EMS providers.

6. John Leighton-Jones (42) 
Group Human Resources Director 
Committees: 
Corporate and Social Responsibility 
Joined TT: 2010 
Experience: Joined from QinetiQ Group plc, 
where he was Human Resources Director. 
Previously worked in a variety of senior 
human resources roles. Originally trained 
as a tax accountant. 

The Operating Board consists of the executive Directors and:

1. Billal Hammoud (39) 
Divisional Chief Executive – Components 
Joined TT: 2010 
Experience: Previously responsible for 
Honeywell’s magnetic, optical and pressure 
sensor portfolios serving the global 
transportation, aerospace, medical and 
industrial markets. An engineer who holds 
an MBA, he is fluent in French and Arabic 
and is six sigma green belt certified.

4. Nigel Brice (50) 
Divisional Chief Executive – Secure Power 
Committees: 
Corporate and Social Responsibility 
Joined TT: 1996
Experience: Has held a number of divisional 
management positions, having had 
responsibility for the Group’s Secure Power 
businesses since 2003. Previously had been 
working in senior management roles for eight 
years with The General Electric Company. 
Started his professional career as a Chartered 
Management Accountant with Saint-Gobain.

50 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

2. Pat Murray (52) 
Divisional Chief Executive – Sensors 
Joined TT: 2009 
Experience: Previously Global Leader of 
Honeywell’s Sensor Division and Regional 
Vice-President and General Manager for 
Europe, Middle East and Africa. A chartered 
engineer and six sigma green belt certified.

5. Paul Felbeck (47) 
General Counsel 
Committees: 
Risk 
Joined TT: 2000 
Experience: Formerly International Legal Counsel 
with MediaOne (now a unit of AT&T). Started his 
professional career as a solicitor with Freshfields.

7. Per-Olof Ahlstrom (35) 
Group Head of Risk and Assurance 
Committees: 
Risk 
Joined TT: January 2012 
Experience: Joined from Everything Everywhere 
Limited, a joint venture between Orange UK 
and T-Mobile UK, where he was Director, Risk 
Assurance and Internal Audit. Previously worked 
with T-Mobile and PwC covering programme, 
service integration, risk, audit and compliance 
management. A CISA accredited Information 
System Auditor with a BSc and MSc, he is fluent 
in Swedish.

 Directors’ report – Governance

 Corporate Governance

The Company is committed to achieving and maintaining high standards of corporate governance. The main and supporting principles of 
good corporate governance set out in the UK Corporate Governance Code (“Code”) have been complied with throughout the year ended 
31 December 2011. Details and explanations of the application of the principles of corporate governance are set out below. 

The Board 
Subject to the Company’s Articles of Association, UK legislation and any directions given by special resolution, the business of the Company 
is managed by the Board. The Board’s main roles are to provide leadership to the management of the Group, determine the Group’s strategy 
and ensure that the agreed strategy is implemented. The Board has also reserved certain specific matters to itself for decision. These include 
financial policy and acquisition and disposal policy. The Board appoints its members and those of its principal Committees having received 
the recommendations of the Nominations Committee and reviews recommendations of the Board Committees and the financial performance 
and operation of the Group’s businesses. It regularly reviews the identification, evaluation and management of the principal risks faced by the 
Group and the effectiveness of the Group’s system of internal control. 

During 2011 the Board comprised three executive Directors and up to five non-executive Directors. All of the Directors served throughout 
the year, with the exception of Stephen King who was appointed on 24 October 2011. David Crowther is the senior independent 
non-executive Director. 

Board and Committee meetings are scheduled in line with the financial calendar of the Company, thereby ensuring that latest operating data is 
available for review and sufficient time and focus can be given to matters under consideration. During the year there were eight principal Board 
meetings on scheduled dates for which full notice was given. Of these principal meetings, one was dedicated to strategic planning, whilst two 
were held at subsidiaries in Leicestershire, UK and Suzhou, China, thereby enabling the non-executive Directors to meet with employees and 
gain a better understanding of these operations. Additional meetings are held as and when required and, during 2011, three such meetings 
took place. The Board has had two principal meetings and one additional meeting to date during 2012. Full details of each Director’s Board 
and Committee meeting attendance are given on page 53 and in the relevant Committee report.

Directors 
Directors’ biographies including the Committees on which they serve and chair are shown on pages 48 and 49. 

At the time of his appointment as Chairman, Sean Watson was considered to be independent in accordance with the provisions of the Code. 
All the remaining non-executive Directors are also considered to be independent as defined by the Code.

In accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association each Director will offer himself for re-election every three years. At the forthcoming 
Annual General Meeting Geraint Anderson and Shatish Dasani retire and, being eligible, offer themselves for re-election. Stephen King, having 
been appointed since the previous Annual General Meeting, retires in accordance with the Articles of Association and, being eligible, offers 
himself for re-election. 

Directors’ interests 
The Directors of the Company at 31 December 2011 held interests in the following numbers of the Company’s Ordinary shares of 25p each on 
1 January 2011, 31 December 2011 and 12 March 2012:

Sean Watson 
Geraint Anderson
Shatish Dasani
Tim Roberts
David Crowther 
Michael Baunton
Stephen King (appointed 24 October 2011)
John Shakeshaft

12 March 2012
Ordinary shares 

31 Dec 2011 
Ordinary shares

173,000

140,000

420,000

33,196

111,006

64,217

50,000

15,479

173,000

140,000

420,000

33,196

111,006

64,217

50,000

15,479

1 Jan 2011 
(or date of 
appointment 
if later) 
Ordinary shares

140,450

140,000

400,000

53,473

103,800

25,000

nil

15,479

The interests of the Directors in the Company’s share options and Long Term Incentive Plan are shown in the Directors’ remuneration report on 
pages 65 and 66. 

TT electronics plc 51   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Governance

 Corporate Governance continued

The Chairman and Group Chief Executive 
The division of responsibilities between the Chairman and the Group Chief Executive has been defined, formalised in writing, and approved 
by the Board:

The Chairman maintains responsibility for the leadership and effectiveness of the Board and setting its agenda; ensuring that all Directors 
receive accurate, timely and clear information on financial, business and corporate matters to enable them to participate effectively in Board 
decisions; facilitating the effective contribution of non-executive Directors in particular; ensuring constructive relations between executive and 
non-executive Directors; and ensuring effective communication with shareholders. He is also responsible for ensuring that the performance 
of individual Directors, the Board as a whole and its Committees is evaluated at least once a year.

The Group Chief Executive is responsible for the operations of the Group. He is responsible for developing Group objectives and strategy 
having regard to the Group’s responsibilities to its shareholders, customers, employees and other stakeholders and, following presentation 
to, and approval by, the Board, for the successful implementation and achievement of those strategies and objectives. His other areas of 
responsibility include managing the Group’s risk profile, including its health and safety performance; ensuring that the Group’s businesses 
are managed in line with strategy and approved business plans, and comply with applicable legislation and Group policy; ensuring effective 
communication with shareholders; and setting Group human resource policies, including management development and succession planning 
for the senior executive team. 

Board procedures 
All Directors have access to the advice and services of the Group Company Secretary and are offered training to fulfil their role as Directors, 
both on appointment and at any subsequent time. There is an agreed procedure for any individual Director to take independent professional 
advice at the Company’s expense if he considers it necessary. 

In accordance with the provisions on conflicts of interest in the Companies Act 2006, the Company has put in place procedures for the 
disclosure and review of any conflicts, or potential conflicts, of interest which the Directors may have and for the authorisation of such conflicts 
by the Board. In deciding whether to authorise a conflict or potential conflict the Directors must have regard to their general duties under the 
Companies Act 2006. The authorisation of any conflict, and the terms of authorisation, may be reviewed at any time and, in accordance with 
best practice, a review of Directors’ conflicts of interests is conducted annually. 

Board and Committee performance evaluation 
In accordance with the Code, the Board conducted an evaluation of its performance and that of its principal Committees.

The Board performance evaluation programme was led by the Chairman and each Director completed a questionnaire which they used to 
score and comment on a number of performance criteria. These individual responses were then compiled into a single report by the Group 
Company Secretary and this was circulated to the Board for discussion and detailed review. It was concluded that the Board was performing 
satisfactorily, noting in particular that:

•  Board engagement, particularly that of the non-executive Directors, had continued to improve as a result of increased contact with the 

Divisional Chief Executives, together with visits to operational facilities; and

•  the Board had been strengthened by the appointment of an additional independent non-executive Director: Stephen King has relevant 

and recent financial experience and will become Chairman of the Audit Committee at the conclusion of the 2012 Annual General Meeting. 

Future enhancements to the strategic review process were identified so as to encourage greater input from both executive and non-executive 
Directors on strategy development, including the consideration of alternative strategies, at an earlier stage in the process. It was also noted that 
further improvements to risk management should be expected following the appointment of the new Group Head of Risk and Assurance.

Directors’ performance evaluation 
In accordance with the Code, the performance of individual Directors was also evaluated.

Each of the non-executive Directors completed a self assessment questionnaire which required them to score their own performance against 
a number of criteria. The Chairman then held private discussions with each non-executive Director and this provided an opportunity to discuss 
any issues which had arisen in respect of either their individual assessments or those of the Board and its principal Committees. In respect of 
the Chairman’s performance, the other non-executive Directors, led by the senior independent non-executive Director, and with input from 
the Group Chief Executive, met privately to discuss this, with the outcomes being fed back to the Chairman by the senior independent 
non-executive Director for discussion and action as appropriate.

At the beginning of the year, each executive Director was set challenging performance objectives, progress against which was then reviewed 
as the year progressed. All the executive Directors take part in the Group’s performance management programme under which they each 
receive detailed feedback from their colleagues which, together with a review of progress against agreed goals and objectives, is used to assess 
performance and to set clear objectives and developmental plans for the following year which are closely aligned with the Group’s strategic 
priorities and values. The Group Chief Executive met with each of the other two executive Directors to confidentially discuss and review their 
performance against objectives. The performance evaluation of the Group Chief Executive was conducted by the Chairman, taking account 
of the output from the Group’s performance management programme together with feedback provided by the other non-executive Directors 
at a private meeting held to discuss this and any other matters which the non-executive Directors wished to raise.

52 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Board Committees 
The Board has established a number of Committees, each with its own delegated authority defined in terms of reference. These terms are 
reviewed periodically and the Board receives reports and copies of minutes of Committee meetings. The Board appoints the members of 
all principal Board Committees, having received the recommendations of the Nominations Committee. 

Principal Committees 
The principal Committees are the Nominations, Audit and Remuneration Committees. Details of the Nominations and Audit Committees, 
including brief descriptions of their terms of reference (full details of which are available for inspection by shareholders at the Annual General 
Meeting and on the Group’s website) and duties, together with a summary of significant events which have taken place during the year, can 
be found on pages 57 to 59 and should be read as part of the Directors’ report. Details of the Remuneration Committee and its activities are 
contained within the Remuneration report on pages 60 to 66.

Board meeting attendance 2011 
Eight principal Board meetings were held during 2011.

Sean Watson 
Geraint Anderson
Shatish Dasani
Tim Roberts
David Crowther 
Michael Baunton
Stephen King (appointed 24 October 2011)
John Shakeshaft

8 of 8

8 of 8

8 of 8

8 of 8

8 of 8

8 of 8

2 of 2

8 of 8

Additional meetings of the Board and its principal Committees take place as and when required throughout the year. During 2011 there were 
three such Board meetings, all of which were fully attended.

Directors’ attendance at meetings of the principal Committees on which they serve are detailed in the Audit, Nominations and Remuneration 
Committee reports on pages 57, 58 and 60.

Other Committees
Corporate Governance Committee 
The Corporate Governance Committee is responsible for monitoring the Group’s compliance with good corporate governance. During the year 
it was chaired by the Chairman and included the senior independent non-executive Director, the Group Finance Director, the Group Business 
Development Director and the Group Company Secretary. The Committee’s duties are as follows:

•  to review regularly the corporate governance procedures of the Company to ensure that they are up-to-date and effective, and are 

communicated to those employees, officers and/or Directors of the Company or its subsidiaries to whom they are relevant;

•  to make recommendations to the Board from time to time on any procedures, or processes, that may need changing, in order to ensure that 

the Company is compliant with relevant legislation, including but not limited to, the Companies Act 2006;

•  to ensure that the Company is compliant with the standards and disclosures required by the Code and the Listing, Prospectus and Disclosure 

and Transparency Rules of the UK Listing Authority; and

•  to receive reports, or any views expressed by shareholders, stakeholders, government or other regulatory bodies and any other interested 

parties in relation to corporate governance.

The Committee met three times during 2011, during which time it considered recent developments, including those relating to diversity. Details 
of the policy on Board diversity can be found in the Nominations Committee section of this report. The Corporate Governance Committee also 
considered Code provisions regarding the annual re-election of Directors and external facilitation of the Board performance evaluation process, 
notwithstanding the fact that these provisions do not apply to the Company, it currently being outside of the FTSE 350. It was concluded that 
no changes would be implemented but that these matters would be considered again in 2012. The reports and AGM voting recommendations 
from various investor bodies were also reviewed and areas for improvement noted in relation to auditors and audit policy, remuneration and 
environmental, social and governance matters. 

TT electronics plc 53   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Governance

 Corporate Governance continued

Corporate and Social Responsibility Committee
The Corporate and Social Responsibility Committee is chaired by the Group Chief Executive and also comprises one independent non-executive 
Director and up to three senior executives from within the Group. The Committee met four times during 2011 and has had one meeting to date 
during 2012. The Board regularly receives reports on its activities.

Further information on the activities of the Corporate and Social Responsibility Committee is given in the Corporate responsibility section 
on pages 44 and 45.

Risk Committee 
The Risk Committee assists the Board and the Audit Committee in fulfilling their responsibilities by:

•  providing a framework for managing risks throughout the Group; and

•  providing an appropriate level of reporting on the status of risk management within the Group.

This is achieved by promoting awareness of risk management, and ensuring that a risk management framework is in place to ensure that risks 
are identified, quantified, managed, monitored and reported. 

During the year the Committee was chaired by the Group Chief Executive and included the Group Finance Director, the Group General 
Counsel, the Group Internal Controls Executive and up to four senior executives from within the Group. Following the creation of the new role 
of Group Head of Risk and Assurance, the Group Internal Controls Executive has been replaced on the Committee by the Group Head of Risk 
and Assurance. A representative from the Company’s insurance brokers also regularly attends meetings. The Committee met 12 times during 
2011 and has had three meetings to date in 2012. 

Further information on the activities of the Risk Committee, including the work undertaken in relation to the Bribery Act 2010, is given in the 
Principal risks and risk management process section on pages 41 to 43 and in the Review of principal risks and internal controls below.

Review of principal risks and internal controls 
The Directors have overall responsibility for the Group’s systems of internal control and for reviewing their effectiveness. These systems have 
been in place for the full financial year. The Group is committed to a policy of maintaining strict internal control over all of its activities. Controls 
are designed to provide the Directors with reasonable assurance that assets are safeguarded, transactions are properly authorised, and that 
material errors and irregularities are prevented or, failing which, are discovered on a timely basis. The systems of control are reviewed regularly 
and improved where necessary to meet the Group’s requirements. Business risk evaluation takes place at operating company, divisional and 
Group levels as part of the annual budget preparation process. Having identified risks, operating companies and divisions then monitor, review 
and update the risks regularly. 

The Group Chief Executive oversees maintenance of the Group’s Register of Principal Risks. Members of staff who are involved in the Group’s 
risk management function regularly report directly to the Group Chief Executive at Risk Committee meetings. The principal risks of the Group 
are subject to review by the Risk Committee, Audit Committee and the Board. Further details of the Group’s exposure to risk and processes 
in place to manage the same are set out on pages 41 to 43. 

The risk management procedures and systems of internal control are designed to identify and assess the significant risks which the Group 
faces and to manage them appropriately. However, such systems can only provide reasonable and not absolute protection against material 
mis-statement or loss. 

54 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Principal features of the system of internal control 
•  The Directors meet as a Board at least every other month to monitor financial performance, give direction on significant strategic and 

financial issues and review the principal risks of the Group. 

•  The Group Chief Executive chairs a Committee (“Operating Board”) consisting of the executive Directors, Divisional Chief Executives and 

other senior management. The Operating Board meets on a monthly basis and reviews the historical performance and the outlook for the 
Group as a whole and agrees and implements any actions as necessary. In addition, it is responsible for monitoring and driving delivery of 
the Group’s key priorities and acts as a forum to raise and debate significant operational issues. Biographies of Operating Board members 
are given on page 50.

•  The Group Chief Executive also chairs the Risk Committee. Further details on the remit and activities of the Risk Committee are given on 

page 54.

•  Each operating company within the Group operates within the policies, rules and procedures determined by the Directors and 

communicated through an internet based Group Policies hub. The Directors exercise control over operating companies through divisional 
senior executives who monitor and oversee the activities, financial performance and controls of each operating company and seek to 
ensure that these companies comply with Group accounting policies in the process for preparation of consolidated financial statements. 
The directors of operating companies and heads of business units are held accountable for the effectiveness of the implementation 
and maintenance of controls within their companies. This provides constant and consistent management. 

•  The Group has detailed financial planning and reporting systems. Detailed management accounts are prepared monthly by each operating 

company comparing actual performance with budget. The financial performance of each operating company is subjected to detailed formal 
review at monthly meetings. One purpose of these reviews is the early identification of potential business risks and agreement on suitable 
and prompt courses of action. Operating companies prepare strategic plans and annual budgets which are consolidated up to a divisional 
and Group level and are reviewed and approved by the divisional senior executives, Group management and the Board. 

•  The Group has comprehensive control and approval procedures which are rigorously enforced. There are clear definitions of appropriate 
authorisation levels. Capital investment and other major items of expenditure are made only after compliance with detailed appraisal 
procedures and, if above set levels, only with the approval of the executive Directors and the Board. 

•  Accounting and reporting policies and practices require that the Group’s accounting records are prepared consistently, accurately and in 

compliance with Group policy and relevant accounting standards.

•  During 2011, the framework for maintaining control and the adherence to procedures was reviewed by the Group Internal Controls Executive. 

•  During 2011, risk management systems at key operational facilities (as identified by the Operating Board) were reviewed and assessed 

by the Group Internal Controls Executive to identify recommended improvements. 

Responsibility for the above two items now sits with the newly-appointed Group Head of Risk and Assurance, who reports to the 
Group Chief Executive.

•  Certain key functions, including treasury, taxation, pensions, provision of legal advice, risk and insurance are controlled at the Group’s 

head office and are monitored by the executive Directors. 

•  The Directors have reviewed the effectiveness of the systems of risk management and internal control during the year to 31 December 2011 
and during the period since then to the date of this report. They have made, and will continue to make, improvements where necessary.

Financial risk management objectives and policies are set out under Financial risks on page 43. 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 55   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Governance

 Corporate Governance continued

Investor relations
Geraint Anderson and Shatish Dasani meet institutional investors immediately after publication of the annual and interim results. Sean Watson, 
as Chairman, David Crowther, as senior independent non-executive Director and John Shakeshaft, as Chairman of the Remuneration 
Committee, also undertake consultation on certain matters with major shareholders from time to time. Through these Directors the Company 
maintains a regular dialogue with institutional shareholders and analysts and feedback received is reported to the Board so that all Directors 
develop an understanding of the views of major shareholders about the Company. Trading updates and press releases are issued as appropriate 
and the Company’s brokers provide briefings on shareholder opinion and compile independent feedback from investor meetings. Information 
offered at the analysts’ meetings together with our financial press releases are available on the Group’s website. The Annual General Meeting 
is used by the Directors to communicate with both institutional and private investors. 

Going concern 
The Directors have reviewed the budgets for 2012 and the projections for 2013 developed during the 2011 annual strategic planning cycle. 
The Directors have assessed the future funding requirements of the Group and compared them with the level of available borrowing facilities, 
recognising that the main committed facility was re-negotiated during 2010 for a period of three years to May 2013. Based on this, the Directors 
are satisfied that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future. For this reason they 
continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements. 

Approved by the Board on 14 March 2012 and signed on its behalf by: 

Wendy Sharp 
Group Company Secretary 

56 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 Directors’ report – Governance

 Nominations Committee

Membership:

Sean Watson (Chairman)

David Crowther

Michael Baunton

Stephen King (appointed 24 October 2011)

John Shakeshaft

Sean Watson Chairman

Remit:
The Nominations Committee’s remit includes the structure, size and composition of the Board as a whole; the overall leadership needs of the 
organisation; consideration of succession planning for Directors and Divisional Chief Executives (having due regard to the length of service of 
non-executive Directors) and the search for and selection of suitable candidates for the appointment of replacement or additional Directors. 

Committee meeting attendance 2011
During 2011 the Committee met three times.

Sean Watson 
David Crowther
Michael Baunton
Stephen King (appointed 24 October 2011)
John Shakeshaft

The Committee has had no meetings to date during 2012.

3 of 3

3 of 3

3 of 3

1 of 1

3 of 3

2011 review
The Committee seeks to ensure that the Board of TT electronics is balanced and effective with diverse skills, knowledge and experience. 
Diversity and gender inclusiveness span the whole Group and are important and enduring considerations in the search for and selection 
of Board members.

The Committee reviewed Lord Davies of Abersoch’s report “Women on Boards” published in February 2011 and the subsequent changes 
to the Code announced by the Financial Reporting Council in October 2011. The Committee is rigorous in seeking talent and is focused on 
ensuring that the Group has the best possible Board available to promote its interests. The Committee engages external search consultants 
to assist in the specification of Board positions and their selection of prospective candidates to ensure that there is a robust, measurable and 
orderly process. The Committee believes that this rigorous process has, over time, led to the recruitment of talented individuals, significantly 
enhancing the composition of the Board. 

The Committee considers diversity quotas are inappropriate and is committed to recruiting the best talent available, based on merit and 
assessed against objective criteria of skills, knowledge, independence and experience. Its primary objective is to ensure that TT maintains 
the strongest possible leadership.

During 2011 the Committee began the search for an additional independent non-executive Director with relevant and recent financial 
experience with a view to that individual being appointed as Chairman of the Audit Committee, in anticipation of David Crowther stepping 
down from that role. Search consultants were engaged and tasked with ensuring that they considered a wide, diverse pool of potential 
candidates of the appropriate calibre who met the agreed specification. Following interviews with a number of candidates, Stephen King was 
identified as being suitable for the role, having extensive experience in finance, combined with a detailed knowledge of global manufacturing 
businesses. The Committee accordingly recommended Stephen King’s appointment as an independent non-executive Director, serving 
on the Audit and Nominations Committees.

Non-executive Directors’ lengths of service

2005

2006

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

David Crowther 
John Shakeshaft
Michael Baunton
Stephen King

 First three year term 

 First additional three year term 

 Second additional three year term

Performance evaluation
The Committee carried out an assessment of its performance in 2011 based on a review of its activities during the year against its terms 
of reference. It was concluded that the Committee is structured appropriately to provide effective support to the Board. Improved visibility 
on the business and the performance of senior management team members had been achieved by Divisional Chief Executives presenting 
at Board meetings, site visits undertaken by the Board and non-executive Directors participating in Group events. In relation to succession 
planning for executive Directors, the Committee concluded that, in order to maximise the possibilities of succession from within the Group, 
in future it would have greater involvement in the recruitment process for senior positions below Board level.

TT electronics plc 57   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Governance

 Audit Committee

Membership:

David Crowther (Chairman)

Michael Baunton

Stephen King (appointed 24 October 2011)

John Shakeshaft

David Crowther Chairman

Remit
The Committee’s duties include reviewing and advising the Board on: 

•  the integrity of the financial statements; 

•  the appointment and remuneration of external auditors and their effectiveness in line with the requirements of the Code; 

•  the nature and extent of non-audit services provided by the Auditors to ensure that their independence and objectivity are maintained; 

•  changes to accounting policies and procedures, decisions of judgement affecting financial reporting, compliance with accounting standards 

and with the Companies Act 2006; 

•  the scope, performance and effectiveness of the internal audit and other internal control functions and the Auditors’ assessment thereon; 

•  risk management (by reference to reports received regularly from the Risk Committee and the head of the internal control function) and any 

changes to the Register of Principal Risks; and 

•  the Company’s procedures for responding to any allegations made by whistleblowers. 

The Code requires that at least one member of the Audit Committee has recent and relevant financial experience. David Crowther and 
Stephen King both fulfil this requirement. 

Committee meeting attendance 2011
During 2011 the Committee held four scheduled meetings.

David Crowther 
Michael Baunton
Stephen King (appointed 24 October 2011)
John Shakeshaft

4 of 4

4 of 4

1 of 1

4 of 4

The Committee met twice with the Group’s auditors, KPMG Audit Plc, without executives of the Company being present. During the year, 
the Committee also met twice with the head of the internal control function without executives of the Company being present.

The Committee has had two meetings to date during 2012.

58 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

2011 review
In order that the Audit Committee fulfils its duties regarding the integrity of the financial statements and other financial data, the Group 
Finance Director and the Group Financial Controller attend Committee meetings, presenting reports and providing analysis and explanations 
for queries raised. The external auditors are also attendees and present reports on their audits – addressing such matters as an overview of the 
financial statements, key accounting judgements, accounting policies, audit differences and internal control matters.

During 2011 the Audit Committee regularly received reports from both the Risk Committee and the Group Internal Controls Executive who was 
required to attend the Committee’s meetings. The Committee reviews internal audit plans and recommendations, and a formal review of the 
effectiveness of the internal control functions is undertaken as part of the year end process. 

Following a review of the Group’s risk management and internal audit processes undertaken in 2011 in conjunction with KPMG, the Group 
re-organised the risk and internal audit function, establishing a new position of Group Head of Risk and Assurance reporting directly to 
the Group Chief Executive (see page 41 for further detail). The Committee endorsed this review and its recommendations and the steps 
taken subsequently.

Significant matters reported through the Group’s multi-lingual, anonymous whistleblowing portal are reported to, and considered by, the 
Committee. During the year the Committee received details of three matters which were all investigated and action taken where appropriate.

Auditors’ independence, objectivity and effectiveness
The independence of the Auditors is assessed annually by the Audit Committee in order to ensure that suitable policies and procedures are 
in place to safeguard the Auditors’ independence and objectivity, having regard to length of tenure, provision of non-audit services and the 
existence of any conflicts of interest. KPMG Audit Plc were appointed in July 2010, at which time their independence had been considered. 
At the time of the annual assessment, the provision of non-audit services was reviewed and KPMG Audit Plc confirmed that no conflicts of 
interest existed of which the Audit Committee should be aware.

The Committee also reviewed the effectiveness of the Auditors during the year. The use of an evaluation questionnaire assisted in ensuring 
that a comprehensive assessment was undertaken, and reference was made to a report produced by the Audit Inspection Unit of the 
Financial Reporting Council together with information provided by the Auditors.

Following confirmation by the Auditors that none of the comments made by the Audit Inspection Unit of the Financial Reporting Council 
on areas where improvements were required applied to the audit of TT electronics and that no conflicts of interest existed of which the 
Committee should be aware, it was concluded that the Auditors’ independence and objectivity were suitably safeguarded and that they 
were providing an effective service to the Group. 

The Audit Committee has recommended to the Board that KPMG Audit Plc continue in office as Auditors.

Policy on non-audit services
The Company has an established policy regarding the provision of non-audit services. This states that non-audit services may be obtained from 
the most appropriate source having regard to expertise, availability, knowledge and cost. Non-audit services where fees are expected to exceed 
a pre-determined threshold should be approved, in advance, by the Chairman of the Audit Committee or in his absence by another member of 
the Audit Committee. Following a review of the policy during 2011, this threshold was reduced from £50,000 to £25,000. There is also a restriction 
so that non-audit services fees will not exceed the audit service fees, paid to the same service provider, for more than two consecutive years 
unless specifically recommended by the Audit Committee and agreed by the Board. The overriding preference of the Committee is not to 
engage the Auditors for additional non-assurance services, absent compelling reason (e.g. capability, time, cost) to the contrary.

Performance evaluation
The Committee carried out an assessment of its performance in 2011 based on a review of its activities during the year against its terms 
of reference. It was concluded that the Committee was performing satisfactorily, is structured appropriately to provide effective support to 
the Board and had been reinforced by the appointment of Stephen King who will succeed David Crowther as Chair of the Committee at the 
conclusion of the 2012 Annual General Meeting.

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 59   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Governance

 Remuneration report

Membership:

John Shakeshaft (Chairman)

David Crowther 

Sean Watson

John Shakeshaft Chairman

This remuneration report has been prepared according to the requirements of the Companies Act 2006, Schedule 8 of the Large and Medium 
Sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 and the Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority. Additionally, the Board 
has applied the principles for Directors’ remuneration as set out in the UK Corporate Governance Code. The purpose of the report is to set out 
the Group’s remuneration policy with a particular focus on executive Directors.

The Auditors are required to give an opinion on whether certain parts have been prepared in accordance with the Accounting Regulations. 
The report is therefore divided between unaudited and audited information. A resolution to approve the report will be proposed at the 
Annual General Meeting on 15 May 2012.

Unaudited information

Remuneration Committee

Remit:
The role of the Committee is to recommend to the Board the policy for the remuneration of the Chairman, executive Directors, Divisional Chief 
Executives and the Group Company Secretary. Such remuneration includes fees, salaries and other benefits, pensions, performance-related pay, 
share incentive plans and the terms and conditions of service. In determining these matters the Committee has due regard to the contents of 
the Code as well as to the UK Listing Authority’s Listing Rules and associated guidance.

In order to enable the Committee to make informed decisions on executive remuneration, the Committee retained the services of New Bridge 
Street (“NBS”), independent external consultants, to advise on senior executive remuneration matters. NBS provided no other services to the 
Company during the year.

The Group Chief Executive, Geraint Anderson, and the Group Human Resources Director, John Leighton-Jones, also attend Committee 
meetings as and when required to provide advice on Group strategy, performance and remuneration strategy. No individual is present during 
discussions relating to their own remuneration.

4 of 4

4 of 4

4 of 4

Committee meeting attendance 2011
During 2011 the Committee met four times.

John Shakeshaft
David Crowther
Sean Watson

The Committee has had two meetings to date during 2012.

2011 review
The Committee’s main activities during 2011 included the:

•  annual review of base salary levels; 

•  review of executive Director pension arrangements;

•  assessment of annual bonus levels for executive Directors for 2010, payable in 2011;

•  setting of targets for the 2012 executive Directors’ annual bonus plan;

•  review of total remuneration levels for executive Directors and the next level of senior executives;

•  review of the linkage between risk and reward;

•  review of non-executive Chairman’s fees;

•  2011 grant under the Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) (including a review of the performance targets);

•  review of the LTIP structure and the current dilution position; and

•  review of the Committee’s external advisers.

60 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Performance evaluation
The Committee carried out an assessment of its performance, constitution and terms of reference during 2011 based on a questionnaire 
completed by its members. The Committee was deemed to be performing satisfactorily and it was noted that its future performance would 
be enhanced by having access to more in-depth information relating to performance assessments for those individuals under its remit, 
together with increased visibility of management remuneration arrangements across the Group.

Remuneration policy 
The Group is committed to the objective of maximising shareholder return in the longer term ensuring that a strong link between performance 
and reward is maintained. The remuneration policy aims to be competitive, performance based, aligned to shareholder interests and relatively 
simple and transparent in nature.

The Committee aims to pay base salaries around market median levels coupled with highly competitive total rewards that are linked to 
performance and aligned with shareholders’ interests. Remuneration packages must meet the objective of attracting, retaining and motivating 
executives of the highest quality in a challenging business environment. In delivering an appropriate mix between fixed and variable 
remuneration, the Committee is mindful to avoid creating excessive risks in the pursuit of performance metrics.

Following a review of the existing total remuneration framework for the executive Directors and the most senior managers, the Committee 
concluded that the following principles remain appropriate for 2012.

Competitive: Through the combination of base salaries and competitive performance-related incentive mechanisms, the Group aims to 
provide individuals with a competitive total remuneration package in return for superior performance. Base salaries are designed to reflect 
the nature of the role and its responsibility, together with the overall level of individual performance. In ascertaining appropriate salary 
adjustments, account is also taken of prevailing market and economic conditions together with salary levels across the Group.

Performance related: The majority of the executive Directors’ and senior managers’ remuneration packages are determined based on 
the performance of the Group. A significant proportion of this is aligned to shareholder interests given that it is awarded based on earnings 
growth and total shareholder return. Failure to achieve predetermined growth thresholds results in no payout under the Group’s annual bonus 
or long-term incentive arrangements. In order to provide further alignment with the achievement of strategic objectives and delivery of value 
to shareholders, executive Directors have agreed to maintain a minimum shareholding equal to 100 per cent of base salary through the vesting 
of long-term incentives.

Transparency: In order to engender a fair and collaborative culture, total remuneration frameworks are clear and openly communicated.

Components of total remuneration
In the year under review, executive Directors’ total remuneration packages comprised:

•  Fixed pay, including base salary, pension contribution, car or car allowance and private medical insurance; and

•  Variable pay, comprising annual bonus opportunity, participation in a share based Long Term Incentive Plan and participation 

in an all employee share scheme.

No changes were made in 2011 to the level of short-term or long-term incentive payouts payable for achieving either on-target 
or stretch performance.

Base salary 
The Committee reviews salaries annually and takes account of personal and Company performance, together with data sourced from 
companies of a broadly similar size and complexity. 

Details of current base salary levels for executive Directors who served during the year are set out below:

Geraint Anderson 
Shatish Dasani
Tim Roberts

1 January 2012

1 January 2011

% Increase

£388,516 

£266,049 

£210,000

£379,040 

£259,560 

£189,520

2.5%

2.5%

10.8%

In reviewing base salaries from 1 January 2012, the Committee had regard to personal performance, Group performance and pay levels 
within the Group. External benchmark data was also considered based on companies within similar sectors and of a similar turnover and 
market capitalisation to the Group although such external comparisons are used by the Committee with caution given the risk of upwards 
ratchets in pay.

As a result, base salary levels for the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director were increased by the general workforce increase 
of 2.5 per cent. The salary for the Group Business Development Director was increased by 10.8 per cent reflecting both personal performance 
and increasing experience following his promotion to the Board at the start of 2010. All increases were made with effect from 1 January 2012.

TT electronics plc 61   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Governance

 Remuneration report continued

Benefits 
Benefits in kind comprise a company car or allowance and the provision of private medical insurance. 

Pension 
Following a review of market practice conducted at the start of 2011 and for consistency with the Group Finance Director, the Group Chief 
Executive’s and Group Business Development Director’s pension contributions were increased from 10 per cent to 15 per cent of salary. 
The provisions were increased in stages, to 12.5 per cent of salary for 2011 and to 15 per cent from 1 January 2012.

Annual bonus
Bonus arrangements for executive Directors comprise three core elements: operating profit, operating cash flow and attainment of personal 
objectives. The objective of performance-related remuneration is to stimulate improved Group results by providing the opportunity for 
increased remuneration upon the achievement of challenging performance targets.

For 2011, targets comprised a sliding scale of operating profit (50 per cent of total bonus potential), a sliding scale of cash flow (25 per cent 
of total bonus potential) and personal objectives linked to implementation of the Group’s strategy (25 per cent of total bonus potential). 
This recognises the importance attached to successful implementation of the Group’s strategy.

The bonus arrangements for all senior executives below Board level are aligned to the same performance criteria to encourage greater team 
working and include an element of profit of the whole division or group into which they report. 

Bonus awards for 2011
Following the assessment of the performance targets and in light of the Group’s strong revenue and cash performance, the annual bonus 
payment has been calculated at 96.3% of maximum. Performance against each of the targets is set out below: 

Group profit
Group operating cash flow
Personal objectives
Total % of salary

Potential
(% of salary)

Maximum/Stretch 
performance
(% of budget)

% of budget 
achieved

Actual payout
(% of salary)

50%

25%

25%

100%

120%

130%

 n/a

122%

121%

n/a

50%

21.3%

25%

96.3%

For further analysis of the Group’s performance please refer to the Key performance indicators on pages 22 and 23.

Details of bonuses awarded to the executive Directors for the year ended 31 December 2011 are set out in the emoluments table on page 64. 

Annual Bonus Opportunity 2012
The maximum potential bonus which can be earned will continue to be 100 per cent of salary for 2012. The bonus arrangements for 2012 
have been reviewed and will continue to be aligned with profitable growth combined with strong cash performance, supported by the 
achievement of key strategic initiatives through the fulfilment of personal objectives. 

Long Term Incentive Plan 2005 (“LTIP”) 
During the latter part of 2011, the Committee reviewed the operation of the LTIP. The main conclusions of the review were that the LTIP 
should remain the primary long-term incentive scheme in the Company and the structure of long-term incentives should remain unchanged. 
Award levels (100 per cent of base salary) and performance metrics based on earnings per share (“EPS”) and relative Total Shareholder Return 
(“TSR”) against the FTSE SmallCap index excluding investment trusts remain appropriate. However, the Committee concluded that shareholder 
approval should be sought at the 2012 AGM to remove the 5 per cent in ten year limit and, consistent with best practice, a clawback provision 
should be added to the LTIP rules (see below).

LTIP participants may receive annual awards of up to 100 per cent of base salary. The award is a contingent right to receive shares in the future, 
subject to continued employment and the achievement of agreed performance criteria. Participants make no payment upon the grant, vesting 
or release of an award other than such as may be required as a result of tax, social security or other regulatory requirements. Awards normally 
vest three years after the date of grant.

The performance targets attached to awards granted in May 2011 require the achievement of earnings per share (“EPS”) and total shareholder 
return (“TSR”) targets measured over a three year performance period as follows: 

•  50 per cent of an award is based on EPS targets: 25 per cent of the shares subject to this part of the award will vest if the EPS for the year 

ending 31 December 2013 is equal to RPI plus 10 per cent compound per annum, increasing on a straight-line basis to 100 per cent vesting 
for EPS growth of at least 15 per cent compound per annum in excess of RPI; and

•  50 per cent of an award is based on TSR performance targets against companies within the FTSE SmallCap (excluding investment 

trusts) index: 25 per cent of shares subject to this part of the award will vest at median performance increasing on a straight-line basis 
to 100 per cent vesting at the upper quartile of the comparator group. In addition to the TSR targets, the Committee will consider the 
Company’s underlying financial performance to ensure that vesting percentages under this part of an award are appropriate. 

The Committee’s current intention is that similar EPS and TSR targets will apply for awards to be granted in 2012. The Committee considers 
that the combined use of EPS and TSR performance conditions provides a good blend of performance measures, with EPS rewarding strong 
financial performance and TSR rewarding relative stock market performance.

62 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Shareholding guidelines 
The Company operates shareholding guidelines for executive Directors for the LTIP. At the time awards vest under the LTIP (or any other 
executive plan operated in the future), there will be a requirement to retain no fewer than 50 per cent of the shares (net of taxes) until such 
time as a total personal shareholding equivalent to 100 per cent of prevailing base salary has been reached. 

Dilution
The Company’s current dilution position is 4.6 per cent against the 5 per cent in ten year limit and 5.7 per cent against the 10 per cent in ten 
year limit. Given the limited headroom under the 5 per cent in ten year limit and following an extensive investor consultation exercise at the 
start of 2012 during which the Company’s largest shareholders and the major representative bodies were consulted, the Company will seek 
shareholder consent at the 2012 AGM to remove the 5 per cent limit from the LTIP rules.

As the Committee wishes to revert to a 5 per cent in ten year limit over time, the Committee will formally review the dilution position in 2015 
when the Company’s existing LTIP will time expire. That said, to the extent that the Committee is not able to revert to a 5 per cent in ten year 
limit in 2015, the position will be reviewed annually with a long-term objective of reverting to the 5 per cent within a ten year limit. Full details 
with respect to the Company’s dilution position will be provided in future Remuneration Reports.

Clawback
Consistent with best practice, clawback provisions will operate whereby annual bonus and LTIP awards may be clawed back if following 
payment/grant/vesting it transpires that value was awarded/delivered as a result of gross misconduct or a material mis-statement of results.

Total shareholder return 
The Company’s total shareholder return performance for the five years to 31 December 2011 is shown on the graph below compared with 
the index of the FTSE SmallCap companies (excluding investment trusts). As the Company is a constituent of the FTSE SmallCap Index, the 
Directors consider it an appropriate benchmark for the Company’s performance.

120

100

80

60

40

20

)
£
(
e
u
a
V

l

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

31 Dec 06

31 Dec 07

31 Dec 08

31 Dec 09

31 Dec 10

31 Dec 11

This graph shows the spot value on 31 December 2011 of £100 invested in TT electronics plc on 31 December 2006 compared with the value of 
£100 invested in the FTSE SmallCap (excluding investment trusts) Index. The intermediate points are the spot values on each calendar year end.

TT electronics plc

FTSE SmallCap (excluding investment trusts) Index

Share options
The Company has operated a number of share option schemes in the past. The Committee does not intend to make further grants 
to executive Directors under these plans. 

Sharesave Scheme
The Company introduced international all employee Sharesave schemes in 2010 and 2011. Grants under the schemes have been made 
to encourage the involvement of employees in the Company’s performance. The executive Directors have all chosen to participate 
in the UK scheme. 

TT electronics plc 63   
Annual Report 2011

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Governance

 Remuneration report continued

Service contracts 
The executive Directors have service contracts reflecting current market practice and an appropriate balance between the interests of the 
Company and those of the individual Directors. These contracts include 12 month non-compete clauses and standard provisions for summary 
termination and are terminable on 12 months notice from either side. 

Comparison of fixed to variable pay for the Group Chief Executive
The graphs below show the proportion of the package delivered through fixed and variable rewards together with the value of the 2012 
package for on-target and stretch performance:

Proportion of Incentive Package (%)

Value of Package (£'000)

On Target

Exceptional

On Target

Exceptional

0

20

40

60

Salary

Benefits

Bonus

100

80

LTIP

0

200

400

600

Salary

Benefits

Bonus

800

LTIP

1,000

1,200

Non-executive Directors 
The fees of each of the non-executive Directors is determined by the Chairman and the executive Directors, reflecting the time commitment 
required, the responsibility of each role and the fees paid in other comparable companies. The fees paid to the Chairman were reviewed at the 
start of 2012 and were increased by 2.5 per cent. Current fee levels are as follows:

Chairman
Non-executive Director
Audit Committee Chair fee
Remuneration Committee Chair fee

No benefits in kind are provided for non-executive Directors.

Audited information 

£143,500

£39,000

£7,000

£7,000

Aggregate Directors’ emoluments 
Set out below are tables of remuneration of the Directors who served during 2011 and 2010. The amount of each element of the remuneration 
received and receivable by the Directors in the year including base salary and fees paid during the year, bonus, benefits in kind and other 
payments is: 

Executive Directors 
Geraint Anderson 
Shatish Dasani 
Tim Roberts 
Non-executive Directors
Sean Watson
David Crowther 
Michael Baunton 
Stephen King(2)
John Shakeshaft 
Former Directors(3)

Salary/fees
£000

Annual 
bonus(1)
£000

Benefits
£000

379

260

190

140

45

38

7

 45

–

365

250

182

–

–

–

–

–

–

1,104

797

27

23

11

–

–

–

–

–

–

61

2011 
Total
£000

771

533

383

140

45

38

7

 45

–

2010
Total
£000

735

513

345

115

45

14

–

43

37

1,962

1,847

(1)  The amounts are payable under the bonus arrangements in place for 2011 as explained on page 62. 50 per cent of salary was payable against the profit targets, 25 per cent of salary was 

payable against the cash flow targets and up to 25 per cent of salary was payable against personal objectives.

(2) Stephen King was appointed as a non-executive Director on 24 October 2011.

(3) J W Newman retired on 12 May 2010. 

Benefits in kind during the year comprised a company car or allowance and the provision of private medical insurance. No Director received 
an expense allowance during the year. 

64 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
Executive Directors’ pensions – defined contribution 
During 2011, the Company contributed £42,618 for Geraint Anderson, £40,232 for Shatish Dasani and £23,278 for Tim Roberts to the Company’s 
group personal pension arrangement.

Long Term Incentive Plan 
As at 31 December 2011, Directors’ interests under the LTIP were as follows:

Date of grant

28-Aug-08

05-May-09

04-May-10

27-Apr-11

28-Aug-08

05-May-09

04-May-10

27-Apr-11

28-Aug-08

05-May-09

04-May-10

27-Apr-11

1 January 
2011

341,463

875,000

330,189

–

1,546,652

214,634

600,000

226,415

–

1,041,049

10,000

202,667

123,821

–

336,488

Granted 
during 
the year

–

–

–

216,285

216,285

–

–

–

148,108

148,108

–

–

–

108,142

108,142

Lapsed

341,463

–

–

–

341,463

214,634

–

–

–

214,634

10,000

–

–

–

10,000

Vested

31 December 
2011

Market value at 
31 December 
2011
£

Market price at 
grant date 
Pence

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

875,000

330,189

216,285

–

1,176,875

444,104

290,903

1,421,474

1,911,882

–

600,000

226,415

148,108

974,523

–

202,667

123,821

108,142

434,630

–

807,000

304,528

199,205

1,310,733

–

272,587

166,539

145,451

584,577

102.50

30.25

106.00

172.25

102.50

30.25

106.00

172.25

102.50

30.25

106.00

172.25

Vesting date

28-Aug-11

05-May-12

04-May-13

27-Apr-14

28-Aug-11

05-May-12

04-May-13

27-Apr-14

28-Aug-11

05-May-12

04-May-13

27-Apr-14

Geraint Anderson 

Shatish Dasani 

Tim Roberts 

Notes 

(1)  For LTIP awards granted in 2008: 25 per cent of the shares subject to an award vested for EPS growth of 3 per cent compound per annum in excess of RPI, increasing on a straight-line 
basis to 100 per cent vesting for EPS growth of at least 7 per cent compound per annum in excess of RPI. These performance conditions were not met and the awards therefore lapsed.

(2)  For LTIP awards granted in 2009: For 50 per cent of an award, 25 per cent of this part will vest for EPS growth of 3 per cent compound per annum in excess of RPI, increasing on a 

straight-line basis to 100 per cent vesting for EPS growth of at least 7 per cent compound per annum in excess of RPI. For the other 50 per cent, 25 per cent of this part will vest at median 
performance against the FTSE SmallCap (excluding Investment Trusts) increasing on a straight-line basis to 100 per cent vesting at the upper quartile. In addition to the TSR targets, the 
Committee will consider the Company’s underlying financial performance to ensure that vesting percentages under this part of an award are appropriate. 

(3)  For LTIP awards granted in 2010: For 50 per cent of an award, 25 per cent of this part of an award will vest if the EPS for the year ending 31 December 2012 is equal to 12 pence, 

increasing on a straight-line basis to 100 per cent vesting for EPS of 14 pence or more. For the other 50 per cent, 25 per cent of this part of an award will vest at median performance 
against the FTSE SmallCap (excluding Investment Trusts) increasing on a straight-line basis to 100 per cent vesting at the upper quartile. In addition to the TSR targets, the Committee 
will consider the Company’s underlying financial performance to ensure that vesting percentages under this part of an award are appropriate.

(4)  For LTIP awards granted in 2011: For 50 per cent of an award, 25 per cent of this part will vest for EPS growth of 10 per cent compound per annum in excess of RPI, increasing on a 

straight-line basis to 100 per cent vesting for EPS growth of at least 15 per cent compound per annum in excess of RPI. For the other 50 per cent, 25 per cent of this part of an award 
will vest at median performance against the FTSE SmallCap (excluding Investment Trusts) increasing on a straight-line basis to 100 per cent vesting at the upper quartile. In addition 
to the TSR targets, the Committee will consider the Company’s underlying financial performance to ensure that vesting percentages under this part of an award are appropriate.

(5)  The market value at 31 December 2011 represents the total number of shares award multiplied by 134.5 pence being the share price on 31 December 2011. The calculation does not take 

into account the likelihood of vesting. 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 65   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Governance

 Remuneration report continued

TT electronics plc Sharesave Scheme
As at 31 December 2011, Directors’ interests under the Sharesave Scheme were as follows:

Date of grant

1 January 
2011

Granted 
during 
the year

Lapsed

Vested

Potential gain at 
31 December 
2011 
£

31 December 
2011

Option price
Pence

Geraint Anderson 

01-Oct-10

13,552

Shatish Dasani 

01-Oct-10

Tim Roberts 

01-Oct-10

7,894

7,894

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

13,552

7,894

7,894

2,778

1,618

1,618

114

114

114

Exercisable 
between
1 Nov 15–30 
Apr 16 
1 Nov 13–30 
Apr 14
1 Nov 13–30 
Apr 14

Notes

(1)  The potential gain at 31 December 2011 represents the total number of shares under option multiplied by 134.5 pence being the share price on 31 December 2011 less the option price. 

The calculation assumes that the executive Director remains employed and completes the contract. 

The closing middle market prices for an Ordinary share of 25 pence of the Company on 31 December 2010 and 2011 as derived from the 
Stock Exchange Daily Official List were 172.0 pence and 134.5 pence respectively. During 2011 the middle market price of TT electronics plc 
Ordinary shares ranged between 120.5 pence and 208.0 pence. 

Conclusion
In a volatile year for the global economy, TT electronics performed well. In determining base salary adjustments, annual bonus, and long-term 
awards, the Committee has recognised the significant achievements of the management team. 

Approved by the Board on 14 March 2012 and signed on its behalf by: 

John Shakeshaft
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

66 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 Directors’ report – Governance

 Other statutory disclosures

Directors’ report
This Annual Report includes the Directors’ report and the audited financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2011. Certain 
information required to be disclosed in the Directors’ report is provided in other sections of this Annual Report. This includes the Overview, 
the Operating and Financial reviews, the Corporate governance and Remuneration reports and specific elements of the financial statements 
noted below and, accordingly, these are incorporated into the Directors’ report by reference.

Principal activities and business review 
TT electronics plc is the parent company of a group whose principal activities during the year were the design, manufacture and sale 
of electronic component and sensor technology for the defence, aerospace, medical, transportation and industrial electronics markets. 
Further details of the Group’s activities and future plans are set out in the Overview and Operating and Financial review sections on 
pages 1 to 45 of this report. 

The principal operating subsidiaries are listed on page 117. 

Results and dividends 
The Group’s profit on ordinary activities after taxation was £25.0 million (2010: £25.9 million). The audited financial statements of the Group 
and the Company are set out on pages 72 to 117. Further details of the Group’s activities are set out in the Operating and Financial review 
on pages 26 to 40. 

The Directors are recommending a final dividend of 3.2p per share for the year ended 31 December 2011 (2010: 2.0p) to be paid on 8 June 2012 
to shareholders on the register at 25 May 2012 which, together with the interim dividend of 1.2p per share paid on 3 November 2011 (2010: 0.8p), 
makes a total for the year of 4.4p (2010: 2.8p). 

Disposals
On 16 May 2011, the sale of WT Henley Electrical (Suzhou) Co. Ltd. in China to Sicame SA (reported in the Annual Report 2010) was completed, 
following receipt of the relevant regulatory approvals from the Chinese authorities.

The Board’s strategic objective to realise value from the businesses within the Group’s General Industrial division was completed during the year 
with the sale of AEI Compounds Limited to Saco Polymers Inc on 11 July 2011 for a gross consideration of £8.6 million.

Directors
Rules for the appointment and replacement of Directors are set out in the Company’s Articles of Association. Directors are appointed by the 
Board on the recommendation of the Nominations Committee. Directors may also be appointed or removed by the Company by ordinary 
resolution at a general meeting of holders of Ordinary shares. The office of a Director shall be vacated if his resignation is requested by all the 
other Directors, not being fewer than three in number. Further details of the activities of the Nominations Committee including details relating 
to the appointments made to the Board during the year are set out on page 57. 

There are no agreements between the Company and its Directors or employees providing for compensation for loss of office or employment 
that occurs as a result of a takeover bid except that provisions of the Company’s share plans may cause options and awards granted under 
such schemes to vest on takeover, subject to the satisfaction of any performance conditions. Further details of the executive Directors’ service 
contracts can be found in the Directors’ remuneration report on pages 60 to 66. Copies of the executive Directors’ service contracts and letters 
of appointment of the non-executive Directors are available for inspection by any person at the Company’s registered office during normal 
business hours on any weekday (public holidays excepted) and at the Annual General Meeting from 15 minutes before the Annual General 
Meeting until it ends.

The Group maintains Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance. The Directors of the Company also benefit from a qualifying third party 
indemnity provision in accordance with Section 234 of the Companies Act 2006 and the Company’s Articles of Association. The Company has 
provided a pension scheme indemnity within the meaning of Section 235 of the Companies Act 2006 to directors of associated companies.

Auditors 
KPMG Audit Plc have expressed their willingness to continue in office as Auditors and a resolution will be proposed to reappoint them at the 
Annual General Meeting. 

The Auditors’ responsibilities are set out on page 71 and should be read in conjunction with those of the Directors as set out at the end 
of this report. 

Annual General Meeting 
The Annual General Meeting of the Company will be held on 15 May 2012 at the offices of Hudson Sandler Financial and Corporate 
Communications at 11.30 am. The Notice of the Company’s Annual General Meeting accompanies this document. 

Fixed assets 
A professional valuation of land and buildings was carried out during the year ended 31 December 2010 and, in the opinion of the Directors, 
the market value, on an existing use basis, as at 31 December 2011 in aggregate is not materially different from net book value. 

Research and development 
The Group carries out research and development in order to develop new products and processes and to substantially improve existing 
products and processes. Further details are given in note 14 to the consolidated financial statements.

TT electronics plc 67   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Directors’ report – Governance

 Other statutory disclosures continued

Significant agreements relating to change of control 
The Group has a number of borrowing facilities provided by various banking groups. Some of these facility agreements include change of 
control provisions which, in the event of a change in ownership of the Company, could result in renegotiation or withdrawal of these facilities. 

There are a number of other agreements that may be renegotiated upon a change of control of the Company. None is considered to be 
significant in terms of their potential impact on the business of the Group as a whole. 

Supplier payments policy 
The Group’s policy in relation to the payment of its suppliers is to agree its terms of payment with each supplier when negotiating the terms of 
each business transaction. It is Group practice to abide by the agreed terms of payment unless the supplier defaults under its own obligations. 
The average number of days’ credit taken by Group companies at the financial year end was 52 days (2010: 55 days). The average number of 
days’ credit taken by the Company for trade purchases at the financial year end was 60 days (2010: 64 days). 

Employment
The Group is committed to the fair and equal treatment of all its employees regardless of gender, race, age, religion, disability or sexual 
orientation. Where existing employees become disabled, the policy of the Group is to provide continuing employment and training wherever 
practicable. The Group makes significant efforts to ensure that high standards of employee welfare are maintained worldwide in all its 
operations, irrespective of geography and local market conditions. Together with many other global companies operating in its sector, the 
Group is a member of the Electronic Industry Citizenship Coalition, a leading industry organisation promoting best practices in corporate 
responsibility, which is committed to raising standards of employee welfare in all jurisdictions and at all levels of the supply chain for electronic 
products. Further details on the Group’s policies relating to its employees are given on page 44. 

Donations 
During the year the Group contributed £58,000 (2010: £58,000) for charitable purposes. Employees across the Group regularly fund-raise for 
charity. Further details on the Group’s fundraising activities are given in the Corporate responsibility section on pages 44 and 45. There were 
no political contributions. 

Share capital 
The Company’s issued share capital comprises a single class of share capital which is divided into Ordinary shares of 25p each. All issued 
shares are fully paid. The share capital during the year is shown in note 18 to the consolidated financial statements. The rights and obligations 
attaching to the Company’s Ordinary shares are set out in the Company’s Articles of Association, copies of which can be obtained from 
Companies House in the United Kingdom or by writing to the Group Company Secretary. Subject to applicable statutes, shares may be issued 
with such rights and restrictions as the Company may by ordinary resolution decide, or (if there is no such resolution or so far as it does not 
make specific provision) as the Board may decide. Holders of Ordinary shares are entitled to speak at general meetings of the Company, to 
appoint one or more proxies and, if they are corporations, to appoint corporate representatives and to exercise voting rights. Holders of 
Ordinary shares may also receive a dividend and on a liquidation may share in the assets of the Company. In addition, holders of Ordinary 
shares are entitled to receive the Company’s Annual Report and Accounts. Subject to meeting certain thresholds, holders of Ordinary shares 
may require a general meeting of the Company to be held or the proposal of resolutions at Annual General Meetings. 

Authority to allot shares and disapply statutory pre-emption rights 
The Directors will be seeking to renew their authorities to allot unissued shares and to disapply statutory pre-emption rights at the 
Annual General Meeting to be held on 15 May 2012. 

Purchase of own shares 
At the Annual General Meeting held on 19 May 2011, the Company was given authority to purchase up to 15,512,889 of its Ordinary shares until 
the date of its next Annual General Meeting. No purchases were made during the year by the Company. The Directors will be seeking a new 
authority for the Company to purchase its Ordinary shares at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting. 

Further details regarding the authority to allot shares and disapply statutory pre-emption rights and the purchase of own shares are set out 
in the Notice of the Annual General Meeting which accompanies this document and is available to view on the Company’s website.

Shares held by the Employee Benefit Trust 
The Company has established an employee benefit trust (“EBT”), the trustee of which is Sanne Trust Company Limited, part of Sanne Group. 
As at 31 December 2011, the trustee held 259,515 shares with a nominal value of £64,879 and an aggregate purchase price of £1.46 per share, 
representing 0.16 per cent of the total issued share capital at that date. This figure was also the maximum number of shares held by the EBT 
during the year. These shares will be used to satisfy awards made under the TT electronics plc Restricted Share Plan (“RSP”) or other employee 
share schemes. The voting rights in relation to these shares are exercisable by the trustee; however, in accordance with investor protection 
guidelines the trustee abstains from voting. The executive Directors as employees of the Company are potential beneficiaries of shares 
held by the EBT. During the year, no shares were disposed of by the EBT by way of the exercise of awards granted under the RSP or any 
other employee share scheme. 

68 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Substantial shareholding notifications 
The Company had been notified of the following voting rights attaching to TT electronics plc shares in accordance with the Disclosure and 
Transparency Rules at 12 March 2012 and 31 December 2011.

J W Newman 
Mondrian Investment Partners Limited
Crystal Amber Fund Limited
Tweedy, Browne Company LLC 
Legal & General Group plc

Number

 10,858,010

7,912,306

8,047,752

7,664,336

6,188,558

12 March 2012

31 December 2011

%

7.0

5.1

5.1

4.9

3.9

Number

10,858,010

7,912,306

8,047,752

7,664,336

6,188,558

%

7.0

5.1

5.1

4.9

3.9

So far as has been ascertained, no other person or corporation holds or is beneficially interested in any substantial part of the share capital 
of the Company. 

Voting rights and restrictions on transfer of shares 
On a show of hands at a general meeting of the Company, every holder of Ordinary shares present in person or by proxy and entitled to 
vote has one vote and on a poll every member present in person or by proxy and entitled to vote has one vote for every Ordinary share 
held. Further details regarding voting at the Annual General Meeting can be found in the Notice of the Annual General Meeting which 
accompanies this document. None of the Ordinary shares carry any special rights with regard to control of the Company. Electronic and paper 
proxy appointments and voting instructions must be received by the Company’s Registrars not later than 48 hours before a general meeting. 
A shareholder can lose his entitlement to vote at a general meeting where that shareholder has been served with a disclosure notice and has 
failed to provide the Company with information concerning interests in those shares. 

The Directors may refuse to register a transfer of a certificated share which is not fully paid, provided that the refusal does not prevent dealings 
in shares in the Company from taking place on an open and proper basis. The Directors may also refuse to register a transfer of a certificated 
share unless the instrument of transfer: (i) is lodged, duly stamped (if stampable), at the registered office of the Company or any other place 
decided by the Directors accompanied by the certificate for the share to which it relates and/or such other evidence as the Directors may 
reasonably require to show the right of the transferor to make the transfer; (ii) is in respect of only one class of shares; (iii) is in favour of a person 
who is not a minor, bankrupt or a person in respect of whom an order has been made on the ground that such person is suffering from a 
mental disorder or is otherwise incapable of managing their affairs; or (iv) is in favour of not more than four transferees. 

Transfers of uncertificated shares must be carried out using CREST and the Directors can refuse to register a transfer of an uncertificated share 
in accordance with the regulations governing the operation of CREST. 

The Directors may decide to suspend the registration of transfers, for up to 30 days a year, by closing the register of shareholders. The Directors 
cannot suspend the registration of transfers of any uncertificated shares without obtaining consent from CREST. 

There are no other restrictions on the transfer of Ordinary shares in the Company except: 

•  certain restrictions may from time to time be imposed by laws and regulations (for example insider trading laws); 

•  pursuant to the Company’s share dealing code whereby the Directors and certain employees of the Group require approval to deal in the 

Company’s shares; and 

•  where a shareholder with at least a 0.25 per cent interest in the Company’s certificated shares has been served with a disclosure notice and 

has failed to provide the Company with information concerning interests in those shares. 

The Company is not aware of any agreements between shareholders that may result in restrictions on the transfer of Ordinary shares or on 
voting rights. 

Articles of Association 
The Company’s Articles of Association may only be amended by special resolution approved at a general meeting of the shareholders. 

UK Corporate Governance Code
The Code is available to view at the website of the Financial Reporting Council, www.frc.org.uk.

Disclosure of information to auditors
To the best of each Director’s knowledge and belief, there is no audit information relevant to the preparation of the Auditors’ report of which 
the Auditors are unaware and each Director has taken all the steps which might be expected to be aware of such relevant information and 
to establish that the Auditors are also aware of that information.

Approved by the Board on 14 March 2012 and signed on its behalf by: 

Wendy Sharp 
Group Company Secretary

TT electronics plc 69   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities 

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect of the Annual Report 
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report. Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and parent Company 
financial statements for each financial year. Under that law they are required to prepare the Group financial statements in accordance with IFRSs as 
adopted by the EU and applicable law and have elected to prepare the parent Company financial statements in accordance with UK Accounting 
Standards and applicable law (UK Generally Accepted Accounting Practice). 

Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the 
state of affairs of the Group and parent Company and of their profit or loss for that period. In preparing each of the Group and parent Company 
financial statements, the Directors are required to: 

•  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently; 

•  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent; 

•  for the Group financial statements, state whether they have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU; and 

•  for the parent Company financial statements, state whether applicable UK Accounting Standards have been followed, subject to any material 

departures disclosed and explained in the parent Company financial statements. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the parent Company’s transactions 
and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the parent Company and enable them to ensure that its financial 
statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They have general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to 
safeguard the assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other irregularities. 

Under applicable law and regulations, the Directors are also responsible for preparing a Directors’ report, Directors’ remuneration report and 
a Directors’ report on corporate governance that complies with that law and those regulations. 

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the Company’s website. 
Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

Responsibility statement of the Directors in respect of the Annual Report 
Each of the persons who is a Director at the date of approval of this report confirms that to the best of his or her knowledge: 

•  each of the Group and parent company financial statements, prepared in accordance with IFRS and UK Accounting Standards respectively, 

gives a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the issuer and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole; and 

•  the Directors’ report on pages 1 to 69 includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the 
Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and 
uncertainties that they face. 

By order of the Board:  

Wendy Sharp 
Group Company Secretary  

14 March 2012 

70 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Report of the Independent Auditors to the 
members of TT electronics plc 

Independent auditor’s report to the members of TT electronics plc 
We have audited the financial statements of TT electronics plc for the year ended 31 December 2011 which comprise the consolidated income 
statement, the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, the consolidated and Company balance sheets, the consolidated statement 
of changes in equity, the consolidated cash flow statement and related notes.  

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Group financial statements is applicable law and International 
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the EU. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the 
parent Company financial statements is applicable law and UK Accounting Standards (UK Generally Accepted Accounting Practice). 

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit 
work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s 
report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the 
Company and the Company’s members, as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed. 

Respective responsibilities of Directors and auditor 
As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ responsibilities set out on page 70 the Directors are responsible for the preparation of the 
financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit, and express an opinion on, the financial 
statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply 
with the Auditing Practices Board’s (APB’s) Ethical Standards for Auditors. 

Scope of the audit of the financial statements 
A description of the scope of an audit of financial statements is provided on the APB’s website at www.frc.org.uk/apb/scope/private.cfm.  

Opinion on financial statements 
In our opinion: 

•  the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent Company’s affairs as at 31 December 2011 

and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended; 

•  the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU; 

•  the parent Company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; 

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006; and, as regards the Group 

financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.  

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 
In our opinion: 

•  the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006; and  

•  the information given in the Directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the 

financial statements. 

Matters on which we are required to report by exception 
We have nothing to report in respect of the following: 

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion: 

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from 

branches not visited by us; or 

•  the parent Company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited are not in agreement with the 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

accounting records and returns; or 

•  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit. 

Under the Listing Rules, we are required to review: 

•  the Directors’ statement, set out on page 56 in relation to going concern; 

•  the part of the Directors’ report on corporate governance relating to the Company’s compliance with the nine provisions of the UK Corporate 

Governance Code specified for our review; and 

•  certain elements of the report to shareholders by the Board on Directors’ remuneration. 

AJ Sykes (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of KPMG Audit Plc, Statutory Auditor 
Chartered Accountants 
15 Canada Square 
London E14 5GL 

14 March 2012 

TT electronics plc 71   
Annual Report 2011

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Consolidated income statement 

for the year ended 31 December 2011 

£million (unless otherwise stated) 

Continuing operations 
Revenue 
Cost of sales 
Gross profit 
Distribution costs 
Administrative expenses 
Other operating income 
Operating profit 
Analysed as: 
Operating profit before exceptional items 
Exceptional items 
Finance income 
Finance costs 
Profit before taxation 
Taxation 
Profit from continuing operations 
Discontinued operations 
Profit from discontinued operations 
Profit for the year attributable to owners of the Company 

EPS attributable to owners of the Company – basic 
From continuing operations (p) 
From discontinued operations (p) 

EPS attributable to owners of the Company – diluted 
From continuing operations (p) 
From discontinued operations (p) 

* Re-presented for discontinued operations in accordance with IFRS. 

Note 

2011 

2010*

3 

3a 
7 
5 
5 

8 
6 

4 

10 
10 

10 
10 

591.3 
(473.0) 
118.3 
(40.7) 
(42.8) 
1.7 
36.5 

34.2 
2.3 
21.1 
(25.8) 
31.8 
(7.3) 
24.5 

0.5 
25.0 

15.8 
0.3 
16.1 

15.5 
0.3 
15.8 

555.5
(456.4)
99.1
(34.5)
(37.6)
2.4
29.4

24.9
4.5
19.5
(23.8)
25.1
(6.7)
18.4

7.5
25.9

11.9
4.8
16.7

11.9
4.8
16.7

72 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income 

for the year ended 31 December 2011 

£million 

Profit for the year 
Other comprehensive income/(loss) for the year after tax 
Exchange differences on retranslation of foreign operations 
Tax on exchange differences 
Loss on hedge of net investment in foreign operations 
Gain/(loss) on cash flow hedges taken to equity less amounts taken to income statement 
Foreign exchange loss on disposals taken to income statement 
Fair value of minority put option 
Actuarial loss on defined benefit pension schemes 
Tax on actuarial amounts in pension deficit movement 
Total comprehensive income for the year 

Total comprehensive income is entirely attributable to the owners of the Company. 

Note 

22 
21 

2011

25.0

0.9
0.1
(0.6)
0.2
–
–
(6.2)
(2.3)
17.1

2010

25.9

2.1
0.1
(0.9)
(0.2)
(1.7)
(3.9)
(5.9)
8.1
23.6

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 73   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Consolidated balance sheet 

at 31 December 2011 

£million 

ASSETS 
Non-current assets 
Property, plant and equipment 
Goodwill 
Other intangible assets 
Deferred tax assets 
Total non-current assets 
Current assets 
Inventories 
Trade and other receivables 
Derivative financial instruments 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Total current assets 
Total assets 
LIABILITIES 
Current liabilities 
Borrowings 
Derivative financial instruments 
Trade and other payables 
Income taxes payable 
Provisions 
Total current liabilities 
Non-current liabilities 
Borrowings 
Derivative financial instruments 
Deferred tax liability 
Pensions and other post-employment benefits 
Provisions 
Other non-current liabilities 
Total non-current liabilities 
Total liabilities 
Net assets 
EQUITY 
Share capital 
Share premium 
Share options reserve 
Hedging and translation reserve 
Retained earnings 
Equity attributable to owners of the Company 
Non-controlling interests 
Total equity 

Approved by the Board of Directors on 14 March 2012 and signed on their behalf by:  

G Anderson  
Director  

S D Dasani 
Director 

74 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Note 

2011 

2010

12  
13  
14  
21  

15  
16  

19  

17  

18  

19  

21  
22  
18  
17  

23  
23  

25  
26  

90.9  
67.3  
11.8  
21.0  
191.0  

83.4  
85.6  
0.5  
69.5  
239.0  
430.0  

14.2  
6.9  
113.0  
6.1  
6.4  
146.6  

40.1 
– 
9.3  
35.5  
0.2  
6.9  
92.0  
238.6  
191.4  

38.8  
0.5  
3.6  
27.2  
119.3  
189.4  
2.0  
191.4  

93.5 
66.9 
14.7 
20.1 
195.2 

81.4 
92.7 
0.4 
44.8 
219.3 
414.5 

5.4 
0.4 
112.9 
4.5 
3.0 
126.2 

49.3 
4.3 
8.9 
41.2 
0.1 
5.4 
109.2 
235.4 
179.1 

38.8 
0.4 
1.6 
26.6 
109.7 
177.1 
2.0 
179.1 

 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Consolidated statement of changes in equity 

for the year ended 31 December 2011 

Share 
capital

Share 
premium

38.7 
– 

0.2 
– 

Share 
options 
reserve

1.0 
– 

Hedging 
reserve

Translation 
reserve

Retained 
earnings 

(11.5)
– 

38.7 
– 

86.3  
25.9  

Sub- 
total 

153.4  
25.9  

Non-
controlling 
interest

2.4 
– 

Total

155.8 
25.9 

– 

– 
– 

(0.2)

– 

– 
– 
– 

2.1 

0.1 
(0.9)

– 

(1.7)

– 
– 
– 

–  

–  
–  

–  

–  

(3.5) 
(5.9) 
8.1  

2.1  

0.1  
(0.9) 

(0.2) 

(1.7) 

(3.5) 
(5.9) 
8.1  

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

(0.4)
– 
– 

2.1 

0.1 
(0.9)

(0.2)

(1.7)

(3.9)
(5.9)
8.1 

(0.2)

(0.4)

(1.3) 

(1.9) 

(0.4)

(2.3)

£million 

At 1 January 2010 
Profit for the year 
Other comprehensive income 
Exchange differences on translation 
of foreign operations 
Tax on exchange differences 
Net loss on hedge of net investment in 
foreign operations 
Net loss on cash flow hedges taken to equity 
less amounts taken to income statement 
Foreign exchange loss on disposals taken 
to income statement 
Fair value of minority put option 
Actuarial loss on defined benefit pension scheme 
Tax on actuarial amounts in pension 
deficit movement 
Total other comprehensive income 
Transactions with owners recorded directly 
in equity 
Equity dividends paid by the Company 
Share-based payments 
Deferred tax on share-based payments 
New shares issued 
Own shares acquired 
At 31 December 2010 
Profit for the year 
Other comprehensive income 
Exchange differences on translation 
of foreign operations 
Tax on exchange differences 
Net loss on hedge of net investment in 
foreign operations 
Net gain on cash flow hedges taken to equity 
less amounts taken to income statement 
Actuarial loss on defined benefit pension scheme 
Tax on actuarial amounts in pension 
deficit movement 
Total other comprehensive income 
Transactions with owners recorded directly 
in equity 
Equity dividends paid by the Company 
Change in fair value of minority put option 
Share-based payments 
Deferred tax on share-based payments 
New shares issued 
At 31 December 2011 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 
– 
– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
0.1 
– 
38.8 
– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
38.8 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 
– 
– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
0.2 
– 
0.4 
– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
0.1 
0.5 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 

– 
– 
– 

– 

– 
0.3 
0.7 
– 
(0.4)
1.6 
– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
(11.7)
– 

– 

– 
– 

0.2 

– 
– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
38.3 
– 

0.9 

0.1 
(0.6)

– 

– 
– 

(1.2) 
–  
–  
–  
–  
109.7  
25.0  

–  

–  
–  

–  

(6.2) 
(2.3) 

(1.2) 
0.3  
0.7  
0.3  
(0.4) 
177.1  
25.0  

0.9  

0.1  
(0.6) 

0.2  

(6.2) 
(2.3) 

0.2 

0.4 

(8.5) 

(7.9) 

– 
– 
1.7 
0.3 
– 
3.6 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
(11.5)

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
38.7 

(5.0) 
(1.9) 
–  
–  
–  
119.3  

(5.0) 
(1.9) 
1.7  
0.3  
0.1  
189.4  

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
2.0 
– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 
– 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
2.0 

(1.2)
0.3 
0.7 
0.3 
(0.4)
179.1 
25.0 

0.9 

0.1 
(0.6)

0.2 

(6.2)
(2.3)

(7.9)

(5.0)
(1.9)
1.7 
0.3 
0.1 
191.4 

TT electronics plc 75   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Consolidated cash flow statement 

for the year ended 31 December 2011 

£million 

Note 

2011 

Cash flows from operating activities 
Profit for the year 
Taxation  
Net finance costs 
Exceptional items 
Profit on disposal of discontinued operations 
Operating profit from discontinued operations before exceptional items 
Operating profit from continuing operations before exceptional items 
Adjustments for: 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 
Amortisation of intangible assets 
Impairment of intangible assets 
Other items including share-based payments 
Increase in inventories 
(Increase)/decrease in receivables 
Increase in payables 
Operating cash flow before exceptional payments 
Special payments to pension funds 
Exceptional restructuring costs 
Net cash generated from operations 
Income taxes paid 
Net cash flow from operating activities 
Cash flows from investing activities 
Interest received 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and grants received 
Development expenditure 
Purchase of other intangibles 
Disposal of subsidiaries (net of cash in subsidiaries at date of disposal) 
Deferred consideration received from disposal of subsidiaries in 2010 
Net cash flow (used in)/from investing activities 
Cash flows from financing activities 
Issue of share capital 
Interest paid 
Repayment of borrowings 
Proceeds from borrowings (2010: net of arrangement costs of £2.0 million) 
Finance leases 
Dividends paid by the Company 
Net cash flow used in financing activities 
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year 
Exchange differences 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year 
Cash and cash equivalents comprise 
Cash at bank and in hand 
Bank overdrafts 

25.0  
7.3  
4.7  
(2.3) 
(0.5) 
–  
34.2  

16.9  
7.6  
0.6  
(1.7) 
(5.3) 
0.8  
9.9  
63.0  
(3.5) 
(2.2) 
57.3  
(7.9) 
49.4  

0.3  
(21.3) 
2.0  
(5.3) 
(0.3) 
7.6  
0.7  
(16.3) 

0.1  
(2.4) 
(11.1) 
0.2  
(0.1) 
(5.0) 
(18.3) 
14.8  
44.2  
(0.2) 
58.8  

69.5  
(10.7) 
58.8  

12  
14  
14  

12  

14  
14  

23  

27  
27  
27  

19  

The consolidated cash flow statement includes cash flows from both continuing and discontinued operations. 

76 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

2010

25.9 
7.1 
4.5 
(4.5)
(7.1)
(1.0)
24.9 

21.2 
9.6 
– 
(0.5)
(6.0)
(15.2)
26.2 
60.2 
(3.2)
(5.0)
52.0 
(7.0)
45.0 

0.2 
(10.8)
1.7 
(6.0)
(1.4)
21.7 
– 
5.4 

0.3 
(2.9)
(86.5)
59.1 
(0.1)
(1.2)
(31.3)
19.1 
24.5 
0.6 
44.2 

44.8 
(0.6)
44.2 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 

1 Basis of preparation 

a) Basis of accounting 
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared on a historical cost basis modified by the revaluation of financial assets and derivatives 
held at fair value and by the revaluation of certain property, plant and equipment at the transition date to International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRS). The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRS as issued by the International Accounting 
Standards Board (IASB) and interpretations issued by the International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) of the IASB, as 
adopted by the European Union, and in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006. 

The financial statements set out on pages 72 to 111 have been prepared using consistent accounting policies, except for the adoption of new 
accounting standards and interpretations noted below. Adoption of these standards and interpretations did not have a significant impact on the 
financial position and performance of the Group. 

•  “Improvements to IFRSs”. The Group adopted the Improvements to IFRSs on 1 January 2011. 

•  IAS 24 “Related party disclosures”. The Group adopted the amendment to IAS 24 on 1 January 2011. The amendment clarified the definition 

of a related party. 

b) Basis of consolidation  
The consolidated financial statements set out the Group’s financial position as at 31 December 2011 and the Group’s financial performance for the 
year ended 31 December 2011. 

Subsidiaries are those enterprises controlled by the Group. Control exists when the Group has the power, directly or indirectly, to govern the 
financial and operating policies of an enterprise so as to obtain benefits from its activities. Subsidiaries are consolidated from the date on which 
control is transferred to the Group and cease to be consolidated from the date on which control is transferred out of the Group. 

All intercompany balances and transactions, including unrealised profits arising from intra-group transactions, have been eliminated in full. 
Unrealised losses are eliminated in the same way as unrealised gains except that they are only eliminated to the extent that there is no evidence 
of impairment. 

c) Discontinued operations 
In accordance with IFRS 5 “Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations”, comparatives for prior years have been re-presented for 
businesses treated as discontinued. 

d) Going concern 
The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position are set on pages 6 to 37. 
The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are described in the Financial review on pages 38 to 40. 
In addition, note 20 to the financial statements includes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its capital; its financial risk 
management objectives; details of its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its exposures to credit risk and liquidity risk. 

The Group had a net cash balance of £15.2 million at 31 December 2011, compared to a net debt balance of £9.9 million at 31 December 2010, 
with available financial headroom of over £100 million. Given the considerable financial resources available, together with long-term partnerships 
with a number of key customers and suppliers across different geographic areas and industries, the Directors believe that the Group is well placed 
to manage its business risks successfully. 

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources and financial headroom to continue in operational 
existence for the foreseeable future. Thus they continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the annual financial 
statements. Further details are contained in the Directors’ report on page 56. 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 77   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

1 Basis of preparation (continued) 

e) New standards and interpretations not yet adopted 
There were no revisions to adopted IFRSs which became applicable in 2011 which had a significant impact on the Group’s financial statements. 
In preparing the consolidated financial statements, the Group has not applied the following relevant standards and interpretations that have been 
issued but are not yet effective: 

The Group does not expect there to be a significant impact on its financial position or performance arising from adoption of these 
accounting standards. 

IAS 1 
IAS 19 
IFRS 9 
IFRS 10 
IFRS 11 
IFRS 12 
IFRS 13 

Presentation of financial statements (Amendment) 
Employee benefits (Amendment) 
Financial instruments: Classification and measurement 
Consolidated financial statements 
Joint arrangements 
Disclosure of interests in other entities 
Fair value measurement 

Effective date  

1 July 2012 
1 January 2013 
1 January 2013 
1 January 2013 
1 January 2013 
1 January 2013 
1 January 2013 

f) Change in accounting policies 
There have been no changes to accounting policies during the year, except for the adoption of new standards and interpretations as disclosed 
in note 1(a). 

g) Significant accounting judgements and estimates 

Judgements 
Determining many of the amounts included in the consolidated financial statements involves the use of judgements. These judgements are 
based on management’s best knowledge of the relevant facts and circumstances having regard to prior experience, but actual results may differ 
from the amounts included in the consolidated financial statements. Other than the key sources of estimation uncertainty shown below, the 
Directors believe that there were no material transactions or events during the year which required critical judgements in applying the Group’s 
accounting policies.  

Estimation uncertainty  
The preparation of the consolidated financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires management to make estimates and assumptions that 
affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities at the date of the consolidated financial statements and reported amounts of revenues and 
expenses during the reporting period. Actual outcomes could differ from these estimates. In particular, information about significant areas of 
estimation uncertainty made by the Directors in preparing the consolidated financial statements is shown below: 

•  Note 13 – Impairment of goodwill. The carrying amount of goodwill has been tested for impairment by estimating the value in use of the 

cash-generating units to which it has been allocated. Note 13 outlines the significant assumptions made in performing the impairment tests; 

•  Note 14 – Intangible assets. The recoverability of capitalised development costs is dependent on assessments of the future commercial 

viability of the relevant products and processes;  

•  Note 18 – Provisions. The Group makes appropriate provision on a consistent basis for risks of product liability, litigation, restructuring, credit 

risk and other normal trading exposures with estimates being made regarding the timing of future payments; 

•  Note 21 – Deferred tax. The recognition of deferred tax assets is dependent on assessments of future taxable income in the relevant countries 

concerned; and 

•  Note 22 – Defined benefit pension obligations. The defined benefit pension obligations are calculated using a number of assumptions, 

including future inflation, salary increases and mortality and the obligation is then discounted to its present value using an assumed discount 
rate. The pension deficit has been calculated using the assumptions set out in note 22. 

2 Summary of significant accounting policies 
The following significant accounting policies have been applied in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements. These accounting 
policies have been consistently applied across the Group. 

a) Goodwill  
Goodwill arising on the acquisition of a business, representing the difference between the cost of acquisition and the fair value of the identifiable 
net assets acquired, is capitalised and is tested annually for impairment. Goodwill is not amortised, and any impairment losses are not 
subsequently reversed. The net book value of goodwill at the date of transition to IFRS has been treated as deemed cost. On the subsequent 
disposal or discontinuance of a previously acquired business, the relevant goodwill is dealt with in the income statement except for the goodwill 
already charged to reserves.  

78 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
2 Summary of significant accounting policies (continued) 

b) Other intangible assets 
Intangible assets acquired as part of a business combination are stated in the balance sheet at their fair value at the date of acquisition less 
accumulated amortisation.  

Expenditure on research activities undertaken with the prospect of gaining new scientific or technical knowledge and understanding 
is recognised in the income statement as incurred. Expenditure on development activities, whereby research findings are applied to a plan 
or design for the production of new or substantially improved products and processes, is capitalised if the product or process is technically 
and commercially feasible and the Group has sufficient resources to complete development. The expenditure capitalised includes the cost of 
materials, direct labour and an appropriate proportion of overheads. Other development expenditure is recognised in the income statement as 
incurred. Capitalised development expenditure is stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. The carrying values 
of intangible assets are tested for impairment whenever there is an indication that they may be impaired.  

Acquired computer software licences for use within the Group are capitalised as an intangible asset on the basis of the costs incurred to acquire 
and bring to use the specific software. Costs that are directly associated with the implementation of identifiable and unique software products 
controlled by the Group, and that will probably generate economic benefits exceeding costs beyond one year, are recognised as intangible 
assets. Capitalised software development expenditure is stated at cost less accumulated amortisation. 

The amortisation rates for intangible assets are:  

Acquired patents and licences 

up to 10 years  

Product development costs  

up to 3 years  

Customer relationships  

Software 

3 to 8 years  

3 to 5 years 

Amortisation is on a straight-line basis.  

c) Foreign currency translation 
The functional currency for each entity in the Group is determined with reference to the currency of the primary economic environment in which 
it operates. Transactions in currencies other than the functional currency are initially recorded at the functional currency rate ruling at the date of 
the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are retranslated at the rate of exchange ruling at the balance 
sheet date. Exchange gains and losses on settlement of foreign currency transactions translated at the rate prevailing at the date of the 
transactions, or the translation of monetary assets and liabilities at period end exchange rates, are taken to the income statement. Non-monetary 
assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies that are stated at historical cost are translated to the functional currency at the foreign 
exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. 

On consolidation, income statements of subsidiaries are translated into sterling, at average rates of exchange. Balance sheet items are translated 
into sterling at period end exchange rates. Exchange differences on the retranslation are taken to equity. Exchange differences on foreign currency 
borrowings financing those net investments are also dealt with in equity and are reported in the statement of comprehensive income. All other 
exchange differences are charged or credited to the income statement in the year in which they arise. On disposal of an overseas subsidiary any 
cumulative exchange movements relating to that subsidiary held in the translation reserve are transferred to the consolidated income statement.  

d) Property, plant and equipment  

Initial measurement 
Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. The cost of a tangible fixed asset comprises 
its purchase price and any costs directly attributable to bringing it into working condition for its intended use. The cost of self-constructed assets 
includes the cost of materials, direct labour and an appropriate proportion of production overheads. 

Depreciation 
The cost of each item of property, plant and equipment is depreciated over its useful life. Depreciation is charged to the income statement 
so as to write-off the cost less estimated residual value on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of the asset. Depreciation commences 
on the date the assets are used within the business and the asset carrying values are reviewed for impairment when there is an indication that 
they may be impaired. Freehold land is not depreciated. 

The depreciation rates of assets are as follows 

Freehold buildings 

Leasehold buildings 

2%  

2% (or over the period of the lease if less than 50 years)  

Plant and equipment 

10% to 33¹/3% 

Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of qualifying assets that take a substantial period of time to get 
ready for their intended use are capitalised as part of the cost of the respective asset.  

TT electronics plc 79   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

2 Summary of significant accounting policies (continued) 

e) Investment property 
Property held to earn rental income rather than for the purpose of the Group’s principal activities is classified as investment property. 
Investment property is recorded at cost less accumulated depreciation and any recognised impairment loss. The depreciation policy 
is consistent with those described for other Group properties. The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted, 
if appropriate, at each balance sheet date. 

Investment properties are derecognised when either they have been disposed of or when the investment property is permanently withdrawn 
from use and no future economic benefit is expected from its disposal. The difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying 
amount of the asset is recognised in the income statement in the period of derecognition. 

f) Leases  
Finance leases, which transfer to the Group substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the leased items, are capitalised at the 
commencement of the lease. Plant and equipment acquired by way of finance lease is stated at an amount equal to the lower of its fair 
value and the present value of the minimum lease payments at inception of the lease, less accumulated depreciation and impairment 
losses. The capital elements of future obligations under leases and hire purchase contracts are included as liabilities in the balance sheet. 
Lease payments are apportioned between the finance charge and reduction of the lease liability so as to achieve a constant rate of interest 
on the remaining balance of the liability. Finance charges are charged directly against income. Capitalised lease assets are depreciated over 
the shorter of the estimated useful life of the asset or the lease term. All other leases are treated as operating leases and the cost is expensed 
to the income statement as incurred. 

g) Government grants  
Government grants relating to non-current assets are treated as deferred income and credited to the income statement by equal instalments 
over the anticipated useful lives of the assets to which the grants relate. Other grants are credited to the income statement over the period of 
the project to which they relate.  

h) Inventories  
Inventories are valued at the lower of cost, including related overheads, and net realisable value. Cost comprises direct materials and, where 
applicable, direct labour costs and the overheads incurred in bringing inventories to their present location and condition. Cost is calculated 
on a weighted average cost basis.  

i) Trade and other receivables  
Trade receivables are carried at original invoice price (which is the fair value of the consideration receivable) less provision made for impairment 
of these receivables. A provision for impairment of trade receivables is established when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able 
to collect all amounts due according to the original terms of the receivables. The amount of the provision is the difference between the original 
carrying amount and the recoverable amount, being the present value of expected cash flows receivable. The amount of the provision is 
recognised in the income statement. 

j) Cash and cash equivalents  
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash at bank and in hand, short-term deposits held on call or with maturities of less than three months 
at inception and highly liquid investments that are readily convertible into known amounts of cash and are subject to insignificant risk 
of changes in value, and bank overdrafts.  

k) Deferred taxation  
Deferred taxation is provided on taxable temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in the financial statements 
and their corresponding tax bases. No provision is made for deferred tax which would become payable on the distribution of retained profits 
by overseas subsidiaries where the timing of the reversal of the temporary difference can be controlled and it is probable that the temporary 
difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future. Deferred tax is measured using the tax rates expected to apply when the asset is realised 
or the liability settled based on tax rates enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. However, deferred tax is not provided 
on the initial recognition of goodwill, nor on the initial recognition of an asset or liability unless the related transaction is a business combination 
or affects tax or accounting profit. 

A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the asset can 
be utilised or that they will reverse. Deferred tax assets are reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that the related tax benefit will 
be realised.  

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset if a legally enforceable right exists to set off current tax assets against current tax liabilities and the 
deferred taxes relate to the same taxable entity and the same taxation authority. 

l) Borrowings  
Borrowings are initially recognised at the fair value of the consideration received less directly attributable transaction costs. After initial 
recognition, borrowings are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. 

m) Trade payables  
Trade payables are carried at the amounts expected to be paid to counterparties.  

n) Employee benefits 

Defined benefit plans 
The Group operates defined benefit post-retirement benefit schemes and defined contribution pension schemes. 

80 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
2 Summary of significant accounting policies (continued) 
The liability recognised in the balance sheet for defined benefit schemes is the present value of schemes’ liabilities less the fair value 
of schemes’ assets. The operating and financing costs of defined benefit schemes are recognised separately in the income statement. 
Operating costs comprise the current service cost, any gains or losses on settlement or curtailments, and past service costs where benefits 
have vested. Finance items comprise the unwinding of the discount on schemes’ liabilities and the expected return on schemes’ assets. 
Actuarial gains or losses comprising differences between the actual and expected return on schemes’ assets, changes in schemes’ liabilities 
due to experience and changes in actuarial assumptions are recognised in the statement of comprehensive income.  

Defined contribution plans 
A defined contribution plan is a post-employment benefit plan under which an entity pays fixed contributions into a separate entity and 
will have no legal or constructive obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions to defined contribution pension plans 
are recognised in the income statement in the periods during which services are rendered by employees.  

Termination benefits 
Termination benefits are recognised as an expense when the Group is committed demonstrably, without realistic possibility of withdrawal, 
to a formal detailed plan to either terminate employment before the normal retirement date, or to provide termination benefits as a result 
of an offer made to encourage voluntary redundancy. Termination benefits for voluntary redundancies are recognised as an expense if the 
Group has made an offer of voluntary redundancy, it is probable that the offer will be accepted, and the number of acceptances can be 
estimated reliably.  

Short-term employee benefits 
Short-term employee benefit obligations are measured on an undiscounted basis and are expensed as the related service is provided. 
A liability is recognised for the amount expected to be paid under short-term cash bonus or profit-sharing plans if the Group has a present 
legal or constructive obligation to pay this amount as a result of past service provided by the employee, and the obligation can be 
estimated reliably. 

Share-based payments  
Certain employees of the Group receive part of their remuneration in the form of share-based payment transactions, whereby employees 
render services in exchange for shares or rights over shares (equity-settled transactions). The cost of equity-settled transactions with 
employees is measured at fair value at the date at which they are granted. The fair value of share awards with market-related vesting 
conditions is determined by an external consultant and the fair value at the grant date is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting 
period based on the Group’s estimate of shares that will eventually vest. The estimate of the number of awards likely to vest is reviewed at 
each balance sheet date up to the vesting date at which point the estimate is adjusted to reflect the actual outcome of awards which have 
vested. No adjustment is made to the fair value after the vesting date even if the awards are forfeited or not exercised. 

o) Own shares 
Own equity instruments which are re-acquired (own shares) are recognised at cost and deducted from equity. No gain or loss is recognised in 
the income statement on the purchase, sale, issue or cancellation of the Group’s own equity instruments. Any difference between the carrying 
amount and the consideration paid to acquire such equity instruments is recognised within equity. 

p) Provisions 
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event, and it is probable that an 
outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount. If the effect of the time value 
of money is material, provisions are determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market 
assessments of the time value of money and, where appropriate, the risks specific to the liability. Where discounting is used, the increase in 
the provision due to the passage of time is recognised as a finance cost. 

q) Revenue  
Revenue is measured at the fair value of the right to consideration, usually the invoiced value, for the provision of goods and services 
to external customers excluding value added tax and other sales related taxes and is recognised when the significant risks and rewards 
of ownership have transferred to the customer. In most cases this coincides with the transfer of legal title of the goods. Revenue for services 
is recognised as the services are rendered. 

r) Finance income 
Finance income comprises interest income on funds invested, foreign exchange gains and the expected return on pension scheme assets. 
Interest income is recognised as it accrues. 

s) Finance costs 
Finance costs comprise interest expense on borrowings which are not capitalised under the borrowing costs policy, the unwinding of interest 
cost on employee benefits and provisions and foreign exchange losses. 

t) Income tax 
Income tax for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Income tax is recognised in the income statement except to the extent that it 
relates to items charged or credited directly to equity, in which case it is recognised in equity. Current tax expense is the expected tax payable 
on the taxable income for the year and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years. 

TT electronics plc 81   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

2 Summary of significant accounting policies (continued) 

u) Dividends 
Dividends are recognised as a liability in the period in which they are approved by shareholders. Dividends receivable are recognised when 
the Group’s right to receive payment is established. 

v) Discontinued operations  
The Group reports a business as a discontinued operation when it has been disposed of in a period, or its future sale is considered to be highly 
probable at the balance sheet date, and results in the cessation of a major line of business or geographical area of operation.  

w) Financial instruments 

Recognition 
The Group recognises financial assets and liabilities on its balance sheet when it becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. 

Financial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount is reported in the balance sheet when there is a legally enforceable right to set off the 
recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis, or realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. 

Measurement 
When financial assets and liabilities are initially recognised, they are measured at fair value being the consideration given or received plus directly 
attributable transaction costs.  

In determining estimated fair value, investments are valued at quoted bid prices on the trade date. When quoted prices on an active market are 
not available, fair value is determined by reference to price quotations for similar instruments traded. 

Loans and receivables comprise loans and advances other than purchased loans. Originated loans and receivables are initially recognised in 
accordance with the policy stated above and subsequently re-measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. Allowance for 
impairment is estimated on a case-by-case basis. 

The Group uses derivative financial instruments such as forward foreign exchange contracts to hedge risks associated with foreign exchange 
fluctuations. These are designated as cash flow hedges. At the inception of the hedge relationship, the Group documents the relationship 
between the hedging instrument and the hedged item, along with its risk management objectives and its strategy for undertaking various 
hedge transactions. Furthermore, at the inception of the hedge and on an ongoing basis, the Group documents whether the hedging 
instrument that is used in a hedging relationship is highly effective in offsetting changes in cash flows of the hedged item. 

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges are deferred in equity. 
The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement. 

Amounts deferred in equity are recycled in the income statement in the periods when the hedged item is recognised in the income statement, 
in the same line of the income statement as the recognised hedged item. However, when the forecast transaction that is hedged results in the 
recognition of a non-financial asset or a non-financial liability, the gains and losses previously deferred in equity are transferred from equity and 
included in the initial measurement of the cost of the asset or liability. 

Hedge accounting is discontinued when the Group revokes the hedging relationship, the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated, 
or exercised, or no longer qualifies for hedge accounting. Any cumulative gain or loss deferred in equity at that time remains in equity and is 
recognised when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected 
to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was deferred in equity is recognised immediately in the income statement. 

Derecognition 
A financial asset is derecognised when the Group loses control over the contractual rights that comprise that asset. This occurs when the rights are 
realised, expire or are surrendered. A financial liability is derecognised when it is extinguished. Originated loans and receivables are derecognised 
on the date they are transferred by the Group. 

Impairment of financial assets 
The Group assesses at each balance sheet date whether there is any objective evidence that a financial asset or group of financial assets 
is impaired. A financial asset or group of financial assets is deemed to be impaired if, and only if, there is objective evidence of impairment 
as a result of one or more events that has occurred after the initial recognition of the asset (an incurred “loss event”) and that loss event has 
an impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset or group of financial assets that can be reliably estimated. 

82 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
3 Segmental reporting  
For management purposes, the Group is organised into four divisions, as shown below, according to the nature of the products and services 
provided. Each of these divisions represents an operating segment in accordance with IFRS 8 ”Operating segments“ and there is no aggregation 
of segments. The chief operating decision maker is the Board of Directors. The operating segments are: 

•  Components – specialist resistive components and microcircuits, connectors and interconnection systems; 

•  Sensors – electronic accelerator pedals, engine and wheel speed, temperature and pressure sensors and chassis height sensors; 

•  Integrated Manufacturing Services – the provision of global electronics manufacturing capability with logistics and integrated solutions; and 

•  Secure Power – standby generation and uninterruptible power systems manufacture and service. 

The accounting policies of the reportable segments are the same as the Group’s accounting policies as shown in note 2.  

Following the disposal of AEI Compounds Limited in July 2011, the General Industrial division ceased to exist. This business is shown 
as a discontinued operation in these financial statements and the 2010 comparative amounts have been re-presented accordingly.  

In 2010 Abtest Limited was reported under the General Industrial division, but is now included as part of the Integrated Manufacturing Services 
division. The comparatives for 2010 have been re-presented accordingly. 

The key performance measure of the operating segments is operating profit before exceptional items. The Group reports non-trading income 
or expenditure as exceptional when the size, nature or function of an item or aggregation of similar items is such that separate presentation is 
relevant to an understanding of its financial position. Segment operating profit represents the profit earned by each segment after allocation of 
central head office administration costs and is reviewed by the chief operating decision maker.  

Group financing (including finance costs and finance income) and income taxes are managed on a Group basis and are not allocated 
to operating segments. 

Goodwill is allocated to the individual cash generating units which are smaller than the segment which they are part of. 

a) Income statement information – continuing operations 

£million 

Sales to external customers 
Segment operating profit before exceptional items 
Exceptional items 
Operating profit 
Net finance costs 
Profit before taxation 

£million 

Sales to external customers 
Segment operating profit before exceptional items 
Exceptional items 
Operating profit 
Net finance costs 
Profit before taxation 

There are no significant sales between sectors.  

Components

242.7 
14.8 

Integrated 
Manufacturing 
Services 

100.0  
5.1  

Sensors

166.9 
8.8 

Secure Power

81.7 
5.5 

Components

234.6 
10.7 

Integrated 
Manufacturing 
Services 

92.2  
4.1  

Sensors

143.5 
3.9 

Secure Power

85.2 
6.2 

2011

Total

591.3 
34.2 
2.3 
36.5 
(4.7)
31.8 

2010 
(re-presented)

Total

555.5 
24.9 
4.5 
29.4 
(4.3)
25.1 

TT electronics plc 83   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

3 Segmental reporting (continued) 

b) Segment assets 

£million 

Components 
Sensors 
Integrated Manufacturing Services 
Secure Power  
Segment assets and liabilities 
Assets and liabilities of discontinued operations 
Pensions and other post-employment benefits 
Unallocated assets and liabilities 
Total assets/liabilities 

£million 

Components 
Sensors 
Integrated Manufacturing Services 
Secure Power 
Total continuing operations 
Discontinued operations 
Total 

c) Geographic information 

2011

168.1 
78.9 
45.5 
46.6 
339.1 
– 
– 
90.9 
430.0 

Assets 

2010 

175.9  
79.7  
46.1  
38.0  
339.7  
9.9  
–  
64.9  
414.5  

2011 

48.4  
31.3  
22.0  
24.6  
126.3  
–  
35.5  
76.8  
238.6  

Liabilities

2010

47.6 
27.2 
24.3 
22.9 
122.0 
4.0 
41.2 
68.2 
235.4 

Capital expenditure 

Depreciation and amortisation

2011

11.0 
12.8 
1.7 
1.1 
26.6 
0.3 
26.9 

2010 

5.9  
9.6  
1.0  
0.6  
17.1  
1.1  
18.2  

2011  2010 (re-presented)

9.3  
12.8  
1.4  
0.7  
24.2  
0.3  
24.5  

12.3 
14.6 
1.8 
0.6 
29.3 
1.5 
30.8 

Revenue by destination 
The Group operates on a global basis. Revenue from external customers by geographical destination is shown below. Management monitor and 
review revenue by region rather than by individual country given the significant number of countries where customers are based.  

£million 

United Kingdom 
Rest of Europe 
North America 
Central and South America 
Asia 
Rest of the World 
Total continuing operations 
Discontinued operations 
Total revenue 

2011 

98.6  
250.7  
110.7  
48.7  
70.5  
12.1  
591.3  
12.4  
603.7  

2010 
(re-presented)

95.0 
222.4 
102.3 
58.5 
72.3 
5.0 
555.5 
44.2 
599.7 

No individual customer accounts for more than 10% of Group revenue. Revenue from services is less than 5% of Group revenues. 
All other revenue is from the sale of goods. 

84 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
3 Segmental reporting (continued) 

Non-current assets 
The carrying amount of non-current assets, excluding deferred tax assets and financial assets, analysed by the geographical area in which the 
assets are located is shown below:  

£million 

United Kingdom 
Rest of Europe 
North America 
Central and South America 
Asia 

2011

27.2 
52.4 
75.2 
6.6 
8.6 
170.0 

2010

33.5 
49.9 
76.1 
6.6 
9.0 
175.1 

4 Discontinued operations 
On 11 July 2011 the Group disposed of AEI Compounds Limited, the last remaining business within the former General Industrial division, 
for consideration of £8.6 million in cash before costs. 

During the year ended 31 December 2010, the Group disposed of six other businesses, all of which were part of the former 
General Industrial division. 

The results from discontinued operations shown in the consolidated income statement are as follows:  

£million 

Revenue 
Cost of sales 
Gross profit 
Distribution costs 
Administrative expenses 
Operating profit 
Net finance costs 
Profit before taxation 
Taxation 
Profit after taxation 
Profit on disposal of discontinued operations 
Profit from discontinued operations 

The profit on disposal of discontinued operations is analysed below:  

£million 

Gross cash received 
Less: legal and professional costs 
Less: cash disposed of at completion 
Net proceeds per consolidated cash flow statement 
Deferred consideration receivable 
Less: net assets at completion 

2011

12.4 
(11.4)
1.0 
(0.2)
(0.8)
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
0.5 
0.5 

2011

8.6 
(0.5)
(0.5)
7.6 
0.2 
(7.3)
0.5 

2010 
(re-presented)

44.2 
(36.3)
7.9 
(2.9)
(4.0)
1.0 
(0.2)
0.8 
(0.4)
0.4 
7.1 
7.5 

2010

23.5 
(1.5)
(0.3)
21.7 
1.0 
(15.6)
7.1 

TT electronics plc 85   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

4 Discontinued operations (continued) 
The net cash flows from discontinued operations included within the consolidated cash flow statement are shown below:  

£million 

Operating activities 
Investing activities 
Financing activities 
Net cash flow 

5 Finance income and finance costs 

£million 

Interest expense 
Foreign exchange losses 
Interest on employee obligations 
Amortisation of arrangement fees 
Unwinding of discount factor on minority put option 
Finance costs 
Interest income 
Foreign exchange gains 
Expected return on pension scheme assets 
Finance income 
Net finance costs 

6 Profit for the year 
Profit from continuing operations for the year is stated after charging/(crediting):  

£million 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 
Amortisation of intangible assets 
Net foreign exchange losses 
Cost of inventories recognised as an expense 
Staff costs (see note 11) 
Remuneration of Group Auditors 
– Company and consolidation statutory audits 
– statutory audit of subsidiaries 
– tax services 
– other services 
Government grants credited 
Share-based payments 

Other operating income includes £0.4 million of profit on the disposal of property, plant and equipment. 

2011 

0.7  
0.2  
2.8  
3.7  

2011 

2.2  
2.3  
20.0  
0.6  
0.7 
25.8  
0.5  
1.6  
19.0  
21.1  
4.7  

2011 

16.6  
7.6  
2.3  
475.0  
156.5  

0.2  
0.6  
0.2  
0.1  
(0.7) 
1.7  

2010 
(re-presented)

0.9 
(0.6)
– 
0.3 

2010 
(re-presented)

3.0 
– 
19.8 
0.6 
0.4 
23.8 
0.2 
– 
19.3 
19.5 
4.3 

2010 
(re-presented)

20.0 
9.6 
0.1 
455.9 
141.1 

0.1 
0.5 
0.2 
– 
(1.0)
0.3 

86 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
7 Exceptional items  
£million 

Continuing operations 
Reduction in UK pension liabilities 
Restructuring costs  
Profit on sale of property interest 
Onerous property leases 
Pensions curtailment gain from scheme closure 
Total 

2011

7.5 
(5.2)
– 
– 
– 
2.3 

2010

–
–
1.0 
(0.8)
4.3 
4.5 

a) Year ended 31 December 2011 
For the year ended 31 December 2011, the exceptional items relate to: 

•  a one-off reduction of £7.5 million in the future liabilities of the UK pension scheme following the UK Government’s announcement to change 

the basis of indexation of occupational pension schemes from RPI to CPI (see note 22); and 

•  restructuring costs of £5.2 million primarily associated with the closure of the Components operation in Boone, North Carolina. This amount 
includes impairments of fixed assets of £1.8 million, provisions against inventory of £0.6 million and reorganisation provisions of £2.8 million. 

b) Year ended 31 December 2010 
For the year ended 31 December 2010, the exceptional items relate to: 

•  a curtailment gain of £4.3 million arising from the closure of the UK defined benefit scheme to future accrual;  

•  profit of £1.0 million arising from the sale of property interests; and 

•  a provision of £0.8 million which has been recognised in respect of two vacant properties subject to onerous long-term leases. 

The Group reports non-trading income or expenditure as exceptional when the size, nature or function of an item or aggregation of similar items 
is such that separate presentation is relevant to an understanding of its financial position. 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 87   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

8 Taxation 

a) Analysis of the tax charge for the year 

£million 

Current tax  
Current income tax charge 
Adjustments in respect of current income tax of previous year 
Total current tax charge 
Deferred tax 
Relating to origination and reversal of temporary differences 
Total tax charge in the income statement – continuing operations 

2011 

2010

9.7  
(0.1) 
9.6  

(2.3) 
7.3  

11.3 
(0.1)
11.2 

(4.5)
6.7 

2010

25.1 
7.1 

1.1 
(0.1)
(2.1)
0.3 
0.4 
–
–
6.7 

UK tax is calculated at 26.5% (2010: 28%) of taxable profits. Overseas tax is calculated at the tax rates prevailing in the relevant countries. 
The Group’s effective tax rate for the year from continuing operations was 23.0% (30.2% excluding exceptional items).  

Included within the £2.3 million deferred tax credit for 2011 is £1.6 million relating to exceptional items. 

b) Reconciliation of the total tax charge for the year 

£million 

Profit before tax from continuing operations 
Profit before tax multiplied by the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 26.5% (2010: 28%) 
Effects of: 

Items not deductible for tax purposes or income not taxable 
Adjustment to current tax in respect of prior periods 
Recognition and utilisation of previously unrecognised tax losses 
Current year tax losses and other items not recognised 
Overseas tax rate differences 
Other timing differences – exceptional items 

– other 

Total tax charge reported in the income statement – continuing operations 

2011 

31.8  
8.4  

4.1  
(0.1) 
(4.2) 
0.2  
0.4  
(1.6) 
0.1  
7.3  

The 2010 Emergency Budget and the 2011 Budget announced that the UK corporation tax rate will reduce from 28% to 23% over a period of 
four years from 2011. The reductions to 26% effective from 1 April 2011 and 25% effective from 1 April 2012 were substantively enacted on 
29 March 2011 and 5 July 2011 respectively. As the rate change to 25% was substantively enacted prior to the year end, the closing deferred tax 
assets and liabilities have been calculated at this rate. The resulting charges or credits have been recognised in the income statement except to 
the extent that they relate to items previously charged or credited to other comprehensive income or equity. Accordingly, in 2011 £0.1 million 
has been charged directly to equity. 

Had the further tax rate changes been substantively enacted on or before the balance sheet date it would have had the effect of reducing the 
deferred tax asset by £0.8 million. 

9 Dividends 

Final dividend for prior year 
Interim dividend for current year 

2011 
pence per 
share

2.0 
1.2 
3.2 

2011 
£million 

3.1  
1.9  
5.0  

2010  
pence per  
share 

– 
0.8  
0.8  

2010
£million

–
1.2 
1.2 

The Directors recommend a final dividend of 3.2p which when combined with the interim dividend of 1.2p gives a total dividend for the year 
of 4.4p per share. The Group’s dividend policy is to increase dividends progressively whilst maintaining cover of at least two times underlying 
earnings per share. The final dividend will be paid on 8 June 2012 to shareholders on the register on 25 May 2012. 

88 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
10 Earnings per share 
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit attributable to owners of the Company by the weighted average number of shares 
in issue during the period. The weighted average number of shares in issue is 154.9 million (2010: 154.8 million).  

Headline earnings per share is based on profit for the year from continuing operations before exceptional items and their associated tax effect.  

Pence 

Basic earnings per share 
Continuing operations 
Discontinued operations 
Total 

Pence 

Diluted earnings per share 
Continuing operations 
Discontinued operations 
Total 

The numbers used in calculating headline, basic and diluted earnings per share are shown below. 

Headline earnings per share  

£million 

Continuing operations 
Profit for the period attributable to owners of the Company 
Exceptional items 
Tax effect of exceptional items (see note 8a) 
Headline earnings 
Headline earnings per share (pence) 

The weighted average number of shares in issue is as follows:  

Million 

Basic 
Adjustment for share awards 
Diluted 

2011

15.8 
0.3 
16.1 

2011

15.5 
0.3 
15.8 

2011

24.5 
(2.3)
(1.6)
20.6 
13.3 

2011

154.9 
3.6 
158.5 

2010 
(re-presented)

11.9 
4.8 
16.7 

2010 
(re-presented)

11.9 
4.8 
16.7 

2010 
(re-presented)

18.4 
(4.5)
–
13.9 
9.0 

2010

154.8 
–
154.8 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 89   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

11 Employee information 
The average number of full time equivalent employees (including Directors) during the year from continuing operations was:  

Number 

By function 
Production 
Sales and distribution 
Administration 

By division 
Components 
Sensors 
Integrated Manufacturing Services 
Secure Power  
Total continuing operations  

The aggregate emoluments including those of Directors for the year were:  

£million 

Wages and salaries 
Social security charges 
Employers’ pension costs 

Remuneration in respect of the Directors was as follows:  

£million 

Emoluments 

2011 

2010 
(re-presented)

5,479  
356  
380  
6,215  

3,247  
1,092  
1,149  
727  
6,215  

2011 

135.3  
19.1  
2.1  
156.5  

5,258 
474 
351 
6,083 

3,255 
1,049 
1,062 
717 
6,083 

2010 
(re-presented)

119.1 
20.5 
1.5 
141.1 

2011 

1.8  

2010 
(re-presented)

1.7 

Further details of individual Directors’ remuneration, pension benefits and share awards are shown in the Directors’ remuneration report on 
pages 60 to 66. The 2010 comparative has been re-presented from £1.9 million to £1.7 million to exclude social security charges. 

Key management personnel 
The remuneration of key management during the year was as follows:  

£million 
Short-term benefits 
Post-employment benefits 
Share based payments 

2011 

3.8  
0.2  
0.9  
4.9  

2010

3.7 
0.2 
–
3.9 

In accordance with IAS 24 “Related party disclosures”, key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility 
for planning, directing and controlling the activities of the Group, directly or indirectly. Key management personnel comprise the Directors, 
Company Secretary, Divisional Chief Executives and other members of the Operating Board. Their compensation is considered and 
recommended to the Board by the Remuneration Committee.  

Disclosures on Directors’ remuneration required by the Companies Act 2006 and those specified for audit by the Directors’ Remuneration Report 
Regulations 2002 are included in the Remuneration report. 

90 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
  
 
  
  
12 Property, plant and equipment 

£million 

Cost 
At 1 January 2010 
Additions 
Disposals 
Disposal of subsidiaries 
Net exchange adjustment 
At 1 January 2011 
Additions 
Disposals 
Disposal of subsidiaries 
Net exchange adjustment 
At 31 December 2011 
Depreciation and impairment 
At 1 January 2010 
Depreciation charge 
Impairment 
Disposals 
Disposal of subsidiaries 
Net exchange adjustment 
At 1 January 2011 
Depreciation charge 
Impairment 
Disposals 
Disposal of subsidiaries 
Net exchange adjustment 
At 31 December 2011 
Net book value 
At 31 December 2011 
31 December 2010 

Land and 
buildings 

Plant and
equipment

64.8  
0.1  
(0.6) 
(2.1) 
(0.9) 
61.3  
1.5  
(0.7) 
(0.1) 
(0.5) 
61.5  

16.3  
2.0  
0.4  
(0.3) 
(0.4) 
(0.3) 
17.7  
2.5  
1.7  
(0.1) 
– 
(0.1) 
21.7  

39.8  
43.6  

331.1 
10.7 
(24.7)
(18.5)
(2.8)
295.8 
19.8 
(9.8)
(5.5)
(1.9)
298.4 

268.3 
19.2 
–
(24.2)
(15.4)
(2.0)
245.9 
14.4 
0.1 
(9.0)
(2.6)
(1.5)
247.3 

51.1 
49.9 

Total

395.9 
10.8 
(25.3)
(20.6)
(3.7)
357.1 
21.3 
(10.5)
(5.6)
(2.4)
359.9 

284.6 
21.2 
0.4 
(24.5)
(15.8)
(2.3)
263.6 
16.9 
1.8 
(9.1)
(2.6)
(1.6)
269.0 

90.9 
93.5 

Included within land and buildings are two (2010: three) investment properties with a carrying value of £3.0 million (2010: £3.5 million). 
The fair value of these properties is £5.5 million (2010: £6.0 million). 

The carrying amount of land and buildings includes £0.3 million (2010: £0.3 million) in respect of assets held under finance leases.  

No borrowing costs were capitalised by the Group during the year (2010: £nil) as no significant qualifying assets commenced construction 
after 1 January 2010.  

The depreciation charge for the year is allocated to continuing operations £16.6 million (2010: £20.0 million) and discontinued operations 
£0.3 million (2010: £1.2 million).  

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 91   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

13 Goodwill  

Cost 
At 1 January 2010 
Net exchange adjustment 
At 1 January 2011 
Net exchange adjustment 
At 31 December 2011 

Goodwill is attributed to the following operating company cash generating units in the divisions shown below:  

Components: 
Bl Technologies, USA 
Optek Technology, USA 
New Chapel Electronics, UK 
Semelab, UK 
Integrated Manufacturing Services: 
TT electronics integrated manufacturing services, USA 
TT electronics integrated manufacturing services, Suzhou 
Other 

£million

65.9 
1.0 
66.9 
0.4 
67.3 

£million

29.3 
18.4 
3.4 
2.3 

8.1 
5.1 
0.7 

92 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
13 Goodwill (continued) 
The Group tests goodwill impairment for each cash generating unit (“CGU”) annually or more frequently if there are indications that goodwill 
might be impaired. The recoverable amounts of the CGUs are determined from value in use calculations. The key assumptions for the value 
in use calculations are those regarding the discount rates, growth rates and operating cash projections during the period for which management 
have detailed plans. Management estimate discount rates using pre-tax rates that reflect current market assessments of the Group’s time value 
of money and the risks specific to the CGU being measured. 

As part of the annual budgeting and strategic review processes, the Group prepares cash flow forecasts for the following three years. 
The growth rate assumed after this three-year period is based on long-term GDP projections of the primary market for the CGU. The long-term 
projections used are based on GDP growth of 3.0% (2010: 3.0%). The growth rates assume that demand for our products remains broadly 
in line with the underlying economic environment in the long term future. Taking into account our expectation of future market conditions, 
we believe that the evolution of selling prices and cost measures put into place will lead to a sustained improvement in profitability which 
is higher than in recent years. 

The pre-tax rates used to discount the forecast cash flows are:  

UK businesses 
US businesses 
Chinese business 

2011

8.0%
10.5%
11.5%

2010

8.3%
10.5%
11.5%

Following detailed review, no impairment losses have been recognised in the current or prior year. 

The goodwill allocated to each of BI Technologies, Optek Technology and TT electronics integrated manufacturing services USA are considered 
to be individually significant as they represent more than 10% of the Group’s total goodwill carrying value. After translation using year end foreign 
exchange rates, these CGUs represent 83% or £55.8 million (2010: 83% or £55.3 million) of the total goodwill balance. 

The recoverable amounts exceed the total carrying value of assets for the CGUs by the following amounts:  

£million 

BI Technologies 
Optek Technology 
TT electronics integrated manufacturing services, USA 

2011

12.8
13.8
11.2

2010

11.1
12.6
0.8

The recoverable amounts associated with these goodwill balances have been determined on a value in use basis using conservative 
assumptions. A value in use test requires comparison of asset carrying values with pre-tax cash flows (which exclude any tax benefit). 
Furthermore, the value in use test ignores the related deferred tax liabilities which IFRS prevents from being included in any value in use 
calculation. Key assumptions and sensitivities are as follows: 

Long-term growth rate 
The budget and strategic review for these companies have been extrapolated in perpetuity using a long-term growth rate of 1.0% and discounted 
using the relevant entity discount rate. A key assumption in deriving the growth rate is that the businesses will grow in line with the underlying 
economic environment for the foreseeable future. Revenue would need to (contract)/increase annually by the following amounts for the carrying 
values to be impaired:  

BI Technologies 
Optek Technology 
TT electronics integrated manufacturing services, USA 

2011

(0.6%)
(1.9%)
(3.1%)

Discount rate 
Sensitivity analysis has determined that the discount rate of 10.5% in the US is an influential assumption on the outcome of the recoverable 
amount calculation. For the carrying values to be impaired, the discount rate would need to increase to the following amounts:  

BI Technologies 
Optek Technology 
TT electronics integrated manufacturing services, USA 

2011

13.3%
15.9%
16.6%

2010

(1.5%)
(5.6%)
2.6%

2010

13.1%
15.8%
10.8%

TT electronics plc 93   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

13 Goodwill (continued) 
Cash flows 
Sensitivity analysis has also been performed on the operating cash flow projections. Cash flows can be impacted by changes to sales projections, 
sales prices, direct costs and replacement capital expenditure. In order for the carrying value of goodwill for BI Technologies, Optek Technology 
and TT electronics integrated manufacturing services, USA to be impaired the expected cash flows for every year would need to reduce 
by the following:  

BI Technologies 
Optek Technology 
TT electronics integrated manufacturing services, USA 

2011 

23% 
36% 
41% 

2010

22%
36%
4%

The Directors have not identified any other likely changes in other significant assumptions that would cause the carrying value of recognised 
goodwill to exceed its recoverable amount. 

94 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
  
14 Other intangible assets  

Cost 
At 1 January 2010 
Additions 
Disposals 
Disposal of subsidiaries 
Net exchange adjustment 
At 1 January 2011 
Additions 
Disposals 
Disposal of subsidiaries 
Net exchange adjustment 
At 31 December 2011 
Amortisation 
At 1 January 2010 
Charge for the year 
Disposals 
Disposal of subsidiaries 
Net exchange adjustment 
At 1 January 2011 
Charge for the year 
Impairment 
Disposals 
Disposal of subsidiaries 
Net exchange adjustment 
At 31 December 2011 
Net book value 
At 31 December 2011 
At 31 December 2010 

15 Inventories 
£million 

Raw materials 
Work in progress 
Finished goods 

Product 
development 
costs

Patents, 
 licences and 
other  

Customer 
relationships

30.3 
6.0 
(11.7)
(0.1)
(0.8)
23.7 
5.3 
(11.1)
(0.1)
(0.3)
17.5 

16.9 
8.9 
(11.7)
(0.1)
(0.5)
13.5 
6.7 
0.6 
(11.1)
(0.1)
(0.1)
9.5 

8.0 
10.2 

4.6  
1.4  
(0.6) 
– 
–  
5.4  
0.3  
– 
– 
(0.1) 
5.6  

2.2  
0.4  
(0.2) 
– 
–  
2.4  
0.6  
– 
– 
–  
– 
3.0  

2.6  
3.0  

3.5 
–
–
–
– 
3.5 
–
–
–
– 
3.5 

1.7 
0.3 
–
–
– 
2.0 
0.3 
–
–
– 
–
2.3 

1.2 
1.5 

2011

40.9 
22.8 
19.7 
83.4 

Inventories are stated after deduction of a provision for slow moving and obsolete items of £27.8 million (2010: £24.5 million).  

16 Trade and other receivables 
£million 

Trade receivables 
Prepayments 
Other receivables 

Provisions for impairment in respect of trade receivables are shown in note 20(d)(ii). 

2011

69.1 
9.5 
7.0 
85.6 

Total

38.4 
7.4 
(12.3)
(0.1)
(0.8)
32.6 
5.6 
(11.1)
(0.1)
(0.4)
26.6 

20.8 
9.6 
(11.9)
(0.1)
(0.5)
17.9 
7.6 
0.6 
(11.1)
(0.1)
(0.1)
14.8 

11.8 
14.7 

2010

40.2 
21.8 
19.4 
81.4 

2010

74.5 
8.2 
10.0 
92.7 

TT electronics plc 95   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

17 Trade and other payables  
£million 

Current liabilities 
Trade payables 
Taxation and social security 
Other payables, accruals and deferred income 

£million 

Non-current liabilities 
Accruals and deferred income 

18 Provisions 
£million 

At 1 January 2010 
Utilised 
Arising during the year 
At 1 January 2011 
Utilised 
Arising during the year 
At 31 December 2011 

2011 

2010

57.6  
5.2  
50.2  
113.0  

2011 

6.9  

61.7 
3.6 
47.6 
112.9 

2010

5.4 

Reorganisation 

Environmental  

Legal and other  

Total 

6.6 
(5.5)
– 
1.1 
(2.2)
2.8 
1.7 

0.1  
(0.1) 
–  
–  
–  
–  
–  

2.4  
(1.7) 
1.3  
2.0  
(0.5) 
3.4  
4.9  

9.1 
(7.3)
1.3 
3.1 
(2.7)
6.2 
6.6 

The reorganisation provision in 2011 primarily relates to the restructuring programme associated with the closure of the Boone, North Carolina 
operations and is expected to be substantially utilised during 2012. The environmental provision is for clean up costs of ex-production sites. 
Legal and other claims represent the best estimate for the cost of settling outstanding product and other claims.  

The total provisions are analysed between current and non-current as follows:  

£million 

Non-current 
Current 

2011 

0.2  
6.4  
6.6  

2010

0.1 
3.0 
3.1 

The timing of the utilisation of these amounts is uncertain as they are subject to commercial negotiation and legal process in different 
jurisdictions. 

19 Borrowings  

£million  

31 December 2011 
£60 million multi-currency club facility 
AB Mikroelektronik GmbH loan 
Overdrafts 
Finance leases 
Loan arrangement fee 
Total
31 December 2010 
£60 million multi-currency club facility 
£10 million manufacturing fund loan 
AB Mikroelektronik GmbH loan 
TT Automotive Electronics (Suzhou) Co. Ltd loan 
AB Electronics (Suzhou) Co. Ltd loan 
Overdrafts 
Finance leases 
Loan arrangement fee 
Total 

96 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

Maturity

Currency of 
denomination

Current 

Non-current 

Total

2013
2011

GBP/USD
Euro

2013
2013
2011
2011
2011

GBP/USD
GBP
Euro
CNY
CNY

–  
4.0  
10.7  
0.1  
(0.6) 
14.2  

–  
–  
4.2  
0.6  
0.5  
0.6  
0.1  
(0.6) 
5.4  

39.8  
0.3  
–  
0.2  
(0.2) 
40.1  

39.7  
10.0  
–  
–  
–  
–  
0.3  
(0.7) 
49.3  

39.8 
4.3 
10.7 
0.3 
(0.8)
54.3 

39.7 
10.0 
4.2 
0.6 
0.5 
0.6 
0.4 
(1.3)
54.7 

 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
19 Borrowings (continued) 
In May 2010, the Group agreed a new committed facility of £60 million over three years to May 2013 with a club of four banks comprising 
HSBC, The Royal Bank of Scotland, Santander and Fifth Third Bank of the USA. This facility is made up of a term loan amount of £40 million and 
a revolving credit facility of £20 million. At 31 December 2011, the term loan was fully drawn down and the revolving credit facility was undrawn. 
The interest margin payable on the facility is based on the Group’s compliance with certain covenants (net debt/EBITDA before exceptional items 
and EBITDA before exceptional items/net finance charges) and is payable on a floating basis above £LIBOR or $LIBOR depending on the currency 
of denomination of the loan. Of the £40 million drawn down, a 1% £LIBOR interest rate cap was taken out in June 2010 which limits the interest 
payable on £20 million of the borrowings.  

In May 2010, the Group also agreed a £10 million fixed rate bi-lateral three-year manufacturing fund loan with The Royal Bank of Scotland. 
This loan was repaid in full in April 2011. Arrangement fees with an amortised cost of £0.8 million, gross cost before amortisation of £2.0 million, 
have been netted off against these borrowings in accordance with IFRS.  

The loan in AB Mikroelektronik GmbH is an export facility loan and used for working capital purposes within that business. 

The loans in AB Electronics (Suzhou) Co. Ltd and TT Automotive Electronics (Suzhou) Co. Ltd were both repaid in full in June and 
July 2011 respectively. 

Undrawn facilities 
At 31 December 2011, the total borrowing facilities available to the Group amounted to £102.3 million (2010: £110.7 million). 
At 31 December 2011, the Group had available £33.2 million (2010: £38.4 million) of undrawn committed borrowing facilities and 
£14.8 million (2010: £17.6 million) of undrawn uncommitted borrowing facilities, representing overdraft lines. 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 97   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

20 Financial risk management  
The financial information disclosed in the tables relating to the year ended 31 December 2011 represents continuing operations only. 

The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments are foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, credit risk, liquidity risk and commodity 
price risk. These risks arise from exposures that occur in the normal course of business and are managed by the Group’s Treasury department in 
close co-operation with the Group’s business divisions and operating companies, under the oversight of a Treasury Committee which is chaired 
by the Group Finance Director. The responsibilities of the Group’s Treasury department include the monitoring of financial risks, management of 
cash resources, debt and capital structure management, approval of counterparties and relevant transaction limits, and oversight of all significant 
treasury activities undertaken by the Group. The Group Treasury department operates as a service centre to the business divisions of the Group 
and not as a profit centre. 

A Group Treasury policy has been approved by the Board of Directors and is periodically updated to reflect developments in the financial markets 
and the financial exposure facing the Group. The Group’s Treasury and internal audit departments monitor compliance with the Treasury Policy 
on a regular basis. 

The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise borrowings, cash and cash equivalents and derivatives used for risk management 
purposes. The Group’s borrowings, surplus liquidity and derivative financial instruments are monitored and managed centrally by the 
Group’s Treasury department.  

The Group’s accounting policies with regard to financial instruments are detailed in note 2(w). 

a) Derivatives, financial instruments and risk management 
The Group uses derivative financial instruments to manage certain exposures to fluctuations in exchange rates, interest rates and commodity 
prices. The Group does not hold any speculative financial instruments. 

The Group is exposed to transactional and translation foreign exchange risk. Transactional foreign exchange risk arises from sales or purchases 
by a Group company in a currency other than that company’s functional currency. Translational foreign exchange risk arises on the translation 
of profits earned in overseas currencies into GBP and the translation of net assets denominated in overseas currencies into GBP, the 
Group’s functional currency.  

To mitigate transactional foreign exchange risk, wherever possible, Group companies enter into transactions in their functional currencies with 
customers and suppliers. When this is not possible, then hedging strategies are undertaken through the use of forward currency contracts for 
up to one year ahead. 

The Group uses average rate forward currency hedges to mitigate translational foreign exchange risk taking into account the level of forecast 
profits in foreign currencies, natural hedges and the cost of taking out cover. During 2011, the Group took out average rate forward contracts 
hedging GBP against a portion of US dollar and Euro forecast cash flows for 2011 and 2012. In 2011, the Group broke even on the hedges that 
matured in 2011, and at 31 December 2011 the mark to market position of the 2012 hedges stood at a profit of £0.3 million which has been 
recognised in equity. The Group did not take out any average rate forward contracts in 2010.  

In light of the current economic environment in the Eurozone economy, the Treasury Committee has undertaken an assessment of the sensitivity 
of the Group’s Euro-denominated assets, liabilities and transactional activity to a variety of potential changes to the Eurozone economy and 
consequential impact on the Euro, and has considered the financial and operational consequences of such changes. Mitigating actions have been 
put in place through the use of GBP/Euro cash flow hedges to mitigate the impact of any downside risk arising from the Eurozone uncertainty and 
these hedges are constantly monitored by the Treasury Committee.  

The Group’s interest rate management policy is to maintain a balance between fixed and floating rates of interest on borrowings and 
deposits, and to use interest rate derivatives such as caps when appropriate. The Group holds a three-year 1% LIBOR interest rate cap 
on £20 million of borrowings which caps the interest payable on half of the Group’s fixed-term floating club facility rate debt. 
The interest rate cap matures in May 2013. 

In light of the significant commodity market volatility seen in the second half of the year, the Group commenced an exercise of evaluating 
commodity price hedging for the main base and precious metal exposures faced. These hedges were executed in January 2012 on a 
non-deliverable basis covering a portion of the maximum exposures for 2012. 

The forward currency contracts and interest rate cap have been designated as cash flow hedges and the mark to market valuation of these 
derivatives at 31 December 2011 is taken to the hedging reserve within equity. At 31 December 2011, the Group had a net derivative financial 
liability of £6.4 million (2010: net derivative financial liability of £4.3 million).  

Included within derivative financial liabilities is a cash settled put and call option associated with a minority interest in one of the 
Group’s subsidiaries of £6.9 million (2010: £4.3 million). The option can be exercised by either party within a five year window commencing 
in September 2012. This has been accounted for under the anticipated acquisition method which results in the recognition of the liability at its 
fair value and the elimination of the minority interest. Changes in the fair value of the liability are reflected as a movement in reserves. An interest 
expense on the financial liability is recognised within finance costs in the income statement representing the unwinding of the discount factor. 

98 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
20 Financial risk management (continued)  

b) Foreign exchange risk 
The Group’s exposure to foreign currency is shown below:  

£million  

31 December 2011 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 

31 December 2010 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 

GBP

USD

Euro 

Other

Total

0.3 
0.2 
– 
(0.8)
(0.3)

0.4 
0.1 
– 
(0.8)
(0.3)

5.1 
3.3 
(6.4)
(5.6)
(3.6)

13.1 
5.9 
(6.4)
(11.5)
1.1 

2.3  
2.2  
–  
(1.4) 
3.1  

3.7  
1.9  
–  
(2.4) 
3.2  

2.6 
3.3 
– 
– 
5.9 

3.3 
1.6 
– 
(2.7)
2.2 

10.3 
9.0 
(6.4)
(7.8)
5.1 

20.5 
9.5 
(6.4)
(17.4)
6.2 

A 10% strengthening of GBP against the following currencies at 31 December would have increased/(decreased) equity and profit after tax by 
the amounts shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular interest rates, remain constant. The analysis is performed 
on the same basis for 2010.  

£million 

US dollar 
Euro 

2011

(0.2)
0.3 

2010

0.1 
0.3 

A 10% weakening of GBP against the above currencies at 31 December would have had an equal but opposite effect on the above currencies 
to the amount shown above, on the basis that all other variables remain constant. 

c) Interest rate risk 
The Group has financial assets and liabilities which are exposed to changes in market interest rates. Changes in interest rates primarily impact 
borrowings by changing their future cash flows (floating rate debt) or their fair value (fixed rate debt) and deposits. 

The exposure of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities to interest rate risk is as follows: 

£million 

Financial assets 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Derivative financial instruments 
Total financial assets 
Financial liabilities 
Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 
Derivative financial instruments 
Total financial liabilities 

Floating
rate

– 
52.5 
– 
52.5 

(50.0)
– 
– 
(50.0)

Fixed 
rate 

–  
17.0  
–  
17.0  

(4.3) 
–  
–  
(4.3) 

Non-
interest 
bearing

75.1 
– 
0.5 
75.6 

– 
(114.1)
(6.9)
(121.0)

2011
total

75.1 
69.5 
0.5 
145.1 

(54.3)
(114.1)
(6.9)
(175.3)

At 31 December 2011, 8% (2010: 28%) of total debt was at a fixed rate and the balance was at floating rate. Of the floating rate borrowings of 
£50.0 million, £20.0 million has been hedged using an interest rate cap fixed at 1% until May 2013. Including the impact of the interest rate cap, 
45% of the total debt was fixed at 31 December 2011. 

TT electronics plc 99   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

20 Financial risk management (continued)  

£million 

Financial assets 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Total financial assets 
Financial liabilities 
Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 
Derivative financial instruments 
Total financial liabilities 

Floating
rate

– 
33.8 
33.8 

(39.4)
– 
– 
(39.4)

Fixed 
rate 

–  
11.0  
11.0  

(15.3) 
–  
–  
(15.3) 

 Non- 
Interest 
bearing 

84.5  
–  
84.5  

–  
(110.7) 
(4.3) 
(115.0) 

2010
total

84.5 
44.8 
129.3 

(54.7)
(110.7)
(4.3)
(169.7)

The interest charged on floating rate financial liabilities is based on the relevant benchmark rate (such as LIBOR). Interest on financial instruments 
classified as fixed rate is fixed until the maturity of the instrument. 

Considering the net cash position of the Group at 31 December 2011, any increase in interest rates would result in a net gain in the consolidated 
income statement, and any decrease in interest rates would result in a net loss. The effect on profit after tax of a 1% movement in £LIBOR, based 
on the year-end floating rate net cash/(debt) and with all other variables held constant, is estimated to be £0.2 million (2010: £0.1 million). 

d) Credit risk 
Exposure to credit risk arises as a result of transactions in the Group’s ordinary course of business and is applicable to all financial assets. 
Investments in cash and cash equivalents and derivative financial instruments are with approved counterparty banks and other financial 
institutions. Counterparties are assessed prior to, during, and after the conclusion of transactions to ensure exposure to credit risk is limited 
to an acceptable level. The maximum exposure with respect to credit risk is represented by the carrying amount of each financial asset 
on the balance sheet. 

Credit risk relating to trade receivables  
The Group’s major exposure to credit risk is in respect of trade receivables. Given the number and geographical spread of the Group’s ultimate 
customers and the solvency of major trade debtors, credit risk is believed to be limited. The Group is not reliant on any particular customer in the 
markets in which it operates and there is no significant concentration of credit risk. The Group regularly monitors its exposure to bad debts in order 
to minimise this exposure. 

The Group has strict procedures in place to manage the credit risk on trade receivables. Customer credit risk is managed by each operating 
company within a division but is subject to Group oversight to ensure that each division’s customer credit risk management system operates 
in a prudent and responsible manner. Credit evaluations are performed for all customers and credit limits are established based on internal 
or external rating criteria. The credit quality of the Group’s significant customers is monitored on an on-going basis, and receivables that are 
neither past due nor impaired are considered of good credit quality. Letters of credit or payments in advance are obtained where customer 
credit quality is not considered strong enough for open credit. 

Trade receivables are denominated in the currencies in which the Group trades. The Group’s policy is that receivables and payables not 
in the functional currency of the subsidiary concerned are covered by forward foreign currency exchange contracts. The exchange risk at 
Group level is therefore restricted to the risk on the translation of overseas assets, liabilities and cash flows into GBP which can be hedged using 
foreign exchange hedges.  

There were no material impairments of trade receivables as at 31 December 2011 or 2010. The solvency of the debtor and their ability to repay 
the receivables were considered in assessing the impairment of such assets. 

(i) Risk for trade receivables by geographical regions 
The maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables at 31 December by geographic areas was:  

£million 

Europe (including UK) 
North America 
Central and South America 
Asia 
Rest of the World 

100 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

2011 

39.6  
9.3  
11.2  
8.0  
1.0  
69.1  

2010

44.3 
14.3 
6.2 
7.4 
2.3 
74.5 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
20 Financial risk management (continued)  

(ii) Impairment losses 
The ageing of trade receivables at 31 December was:  

£million 

Not past due 
Past due 0–60 days 
Past due 60–120 days 
More than 120 days 

Gross

50.5 
15.2 
4.1 
1.6 
71.4 

2011 
Impairment 

–  
(0.7) 
(0.4) 
(1.2) 
(2.3) 

The movement in the provision for impairment in respect of trade receivables during the year was as follows:  

£million 

At 1 January 2011 
Charged/(credited) to income statement 
Businesses disposed 
At 31 December 2011 

Gross

44.3 
21.8 
5.4 
4.5 
76.0 

2011

1.5 
0.8 
– 
2.3 

2010
Impairment

– 
(0.1)
– 
(1.4)
(1.5)

2010

1.7 
(0.1)
(0.1)
1.5 

(iii) Credit risk related to other financial assets and cash deposits 
Credit risk relating to the Group’s other financial assets, principally comprising cash and cash equivalents, other receivables and derivative financial 
instruments arises from the potential default of counterparties. Credit risk arising from balances with banks and financial institutions is managed 
by the Group’s Treasury department. Investment of cash and deposits are made only with approved counterparties of high credit worthiness and 
are reviewed on a regular basis to take account of developments in financial markets. 

No material exposure is considered to exist by virtue of the possible non-performance of the counterparties to derivative financial instruments 
and other receivables. 

The carrying amount of financial assets represents the maximum credit exposure. The maximum exposure to credit risk at 31 December was:  

£million 

Other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Derivative financial instruments (current assets) 

2011

7.0 
69.5 
0.5 

2010

10.0 
44.8 
0.4 

e) Liquidity risk 
The Group maintains a balance between availability of funding and maximising investment return on cash balances through the use of short-term 
cash deposits, credit facilities and longer term debt instruments. Management regularly reviews the funding requirements of the Group. 

The Group’s policy is to centrally manage debt and surplus cash balances. 

At 31 December 2011, the Group had £33.2 million of undrawn committed borrowing facilities (2010: £38.4 million). 

Maturity of financial assets and liabilities 
The table below analyses the Group’s financial assets and liabilities, which will be settled on a gross basis, into relevant maturity groups based 
on the remaining period at the balance sheet date to the contractual maturity date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the contractual 
undiscounted cash flows.  

£million  

31 December 2011 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Derivative financial instruments 

Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 
Derivative financial instruments 

On demand

Less than
3 months

3 to 12
months

– 
69.5 
– 
69.5 
(10.7)
– 
– 
(10.7)

71.2 
– 
– 
71.2 
0.1 
(102.3)
– 
(102.2)

3.8 
– 
0.5 
4.3 
(1.1)
(5.2)
(7.5)
(13.8)

 1 to 5 
years 

0.1  
–  
–  
0.1  
(44.8) 
(4.4) 
–  
(49.2) 

Over 5
years

– 
– 
– 
–
– 
(2.2)
– 
(2.2)

Total

75.1 
69.5 
0.5 
145.1 
(56.5)
(114.1)
(7.5)
(178.1)

TT electronics plc 101   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

20 Financial risk management (continued)  
At 31 December 2011, the Group had derivative financial instruments hedging a notional contractual amount of £35.8 million, of which 
£15.8 million relates to foreign exchange cash flow hedges and £20 million to interest rate cash flow hedges. Of this total amount, £15 million 
matures within one year and £20 million matures between one and five years.  

£million  

31 December 2010 
Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 

Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 
Derivative financial instruments 

On demand

Less than
3 months

3 to 12
months

– 
33.8 
33.8 
(0.6)
– 
– 
(0.6)

84.5 
11.0 
95.5 
(0.4)
(110.7)
– 
(111.1)

– 
– 
– 
(6.1)
– 
– 
(6.1)

 1 to 5 
years 

–  
–  
–  
(51.6) 
–  
(5.3) 
(56.9) 

Over 5 
years 

–  
–  
–  
–  
–  
–  
–  

Total

84.5 
44.8 
129.3 
(58.7)
(110.7)
(5.3)
(174.7)

f) Fair value of financial assets and liabilities 
The Group has adopted the amendment to IFRS 7 “Financial instruments: disclosures” for financial instruments that are measured in the balance 
sheet at fair value. This requires disclosure of fair value measurements by level of the following fair value measurement hierarchy: 

•  Level 1 – quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities; 

•  Level 2 – inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) 

or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices); and 

•  Level 3 – inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (i.e. unobservable inputs). 

Set out below is a comparison by class of the carrying amounts and fair value of the Group’s financial instruments that are carried in the 
financial statements.  

Trade and other receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Borrowings 
Trade and other payables 
Derivative financial instruments 

Carrying
value

75.1 
69.5 
(54.3)
(114.1)
(6.4)

2011 

Fair value 

75.1  
69.5  
(54.2) 
(114.1) 
(6.4) 

Carrying 
value 

84.5  
44.8  
(54.8) 
(110.7) 
(4.3) 

2010

Fair value

84.5 
44.8 
(54.4)
(110.7)
(4.3)

The fair value of the financial assets and liabilities are included at the amount at which the instrument could be exchanged in a current 
transaction between willing parties, other than in a forced or liquidation sale. The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate 
the fair values: 

•  cash and cash equivalents, trade and other receivables, trade and other payables approximate to their carrying amounts largely due to the 

short-term maturities of these instruments; 

•  the fair value of derivative financial instrument assets (£0.5 million) are estimated by discounting expected future cash flows using current 

market indices such as yield curves and forward exchange rates over the remaining term of the instrument (level 1 and level 2). The fair value 
of the derivative financial liability (£6.9 million) is estimated using risk-adjusted discounted future cash flow projections (level 3); 

•  provisions for cash payments are discounted back to their present value; and 

•  the fair value of borrowings is estimated by discounting future cash flows using rates currently available for debt and remaining maturities. 

g) Capital management 
The over-riding objectives of the Group’s capital management policy are to safeguard and support the business as a going concern through 
the business cycle and to maintain an optimal capital structure by reducing the Group’s overall cost of capital. The Board considers equity 
shareholders’ funds as capital. 

The Group maintains a balance between availability of funding and maximising investment return on cash balances through the use of short-term 
cash deposits, credit facilities and longer term debt instruments, and management regularly reviews the funding requirements of the Group. 

Dividends are paid when the Board consider it appropriate to do so, taking into account the availability of funding. The Group’s dividend policy 
is to increase dividends progressively whilst maintaining cover of at least two times underlying earnings per share. 

The Group is in a net cash position of £15.2 million (2010: net debt position of £9.9 million). Included within the debt facilities are certain financial 
covenants related to net debt/EBITDA before exceptional items and EBITDA before exceptional items/net finance charges for which compliance 
certificates are produced on a 12 month rolling basis each quarter. All financial covenants were fully complied with during the year and up to the 
date of approval of the financial statements. There are no covenants under negotiation at present. 

102 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
  
  
 
  
 
 
21 Deferred tax 
The amounts of deferred taxation assets/(liabilities) provided in the financial statements are as follows:  

£million 

Intangible assets 
Property, plant and equipment 
Deferred development costs 
Retirement benefit obligations 
Inventories 
Provisions 
Tax losses 
Unremitted overseas earnings 
Share-based payments 
Short-term timing differences 
Deferred tax asset/(liability) 

£million 

Intangible assets 
Property, plant and equipment 
Deferred development costs 
Retirement benefit obligations 
Inventories 
Provisions 
Tax losses 
Unremitted overseas earnings 
Share-based payments 
Short-term timing differences 
Deferred tax asset/(liability) 

As at 
1 January 
2011

Continuing 
operations

Businesses 
disposed

Recognised 
in equity 

Net 
exchange 
translation

As at 
31 December 
2011

(3.7)
(0.8)
(3.0)
11.8 
2.8 
4.2 
0.6 
(0.8)
0.7 
(0.6)
11.2 

(0.5)
(0.8)
0.6 
– 
(0.2)
1.0 
1.5 
(0.4)
0.3 
0.8 
2.3 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 

–  
–  
–  
(2.3) 
–  
–  
–  
–  
0.3  
–  
(2.0) 

– 
– 
0.1 
0.1 
0.1 
– 
– 
– 
– 
(0.1)
0.2 

(4.2)
(1.6)
(2.3)
9.6 
2.7 
5.2 
2.1 
(1.2)
1.3 
0.1 
11.7 

As at 
1 January 
2010

Continuing 
operations

Businesses 
disposed

Recognised 
in equity 

Net 
exchange 
translation

As at 
1 December 
2010

(3.7)
(2.5)
(4.0)
5.6 
1.6 
2.5 
0.1 
(0.3)
– 
(0.3)
(1.0)

0.1 
1.7 
0.9 
(0.5)
1.2 
1.6 
0.5 
(0.5)
– 
(0.5)
4.5 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
0.2 
0.2 

–  
–  
–  
6.6  
–  
–  
–  
–  
0.7  
–  
7.3  

(0.1)
– 
0.1 
0.1 
– 
0.1 
– 
– 
– 
– 
0.2 

The deferred tax movement recognised in equity in respect of retirement benefit obligations of £2.3 million arises due to a reduction in the 
substantively enacted UK tax rate (£0.8 million) and a reduction in the UK pension deficit (£1.5 million). 

Certain deferred tax assets and liabilities have been offset. The following is the analysis of the deferred tax balances:  

£million 

Deferred tax assets 
Deferred tax liabilities 
Net deferred tax asset 

At 31 December 2011, the Group had the following items for which no deferred tax assets have been recognised:  

£million 

Tax losses 
Property, plant and equipment 

2011

21.0 
(9.3)
11.7 

2011

28.0 
12.7 

Included within the £28.0 million (2010: £26.0 million) of unrecognised tax losses in the table above is £19.7 million (2010: £9.8 million) of tax 
losses within the Company. Since UK tax legislation does not allow the utilisation of brought forward tax losses of one UK entity against the 
current year tax profits of another UK entity, the use of these tax losses is therefore limited. 

At the balance sheet date the aggregate unrecognised deferred tax liability in respect of undistributed earnings of subsidiaries 
is £nil (2010: £0.2 million). 

TT electronics plc 103   
Annual Report 2011

(3.7)
(0.8)
(3.0)
11.8 
2.8 
4.2 
0.6 
(0.8)
0.7 
(0.6)
11.2 

2010

20.1 
(8.9)
11.2 

2010

26.0 
16.1 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

22 Retirement benefit schemes 

Defined contribution schemes  
The Group operates 401(k) plans in North America and defined contribution arrangements in the rest of the world. The assets of these schemes 
are held independently of the Group. The total contributions charged by the Group in respect of defined contribution schemes were £2.0 million 
(2010: £1.5 million). 

Defined benefit schemes  
The Group operates one significant defined benefit scheme in the UK and two overseas defined benefit schemes in the USA and Japan. All of 
these schemes are closed to new members and, in April 2010, the UK scheme was closed to future accrual following extensive consultation with 
affected employees being transferred into an enhanced Group defined contribution scheme. A one-off reduction in future liabilities of £4.3 million 
was recognised as an exceptional item in the consolidated income statement in 2010. 

Following the UK Government’s announcement in July 2010 to change the basis of statutory minimum indexation of occupational pension 
schemes from the Retail Price Index (RPI) to the Consumer Price Index (CPI), the Company communicated the impact of this change to affected 
members in 2011. This has resulted in a one-off reduction in the future liabilities of £7.5 million which has been recognised as an exceptional item 
within the consolidated income statement (see note 7). 

The Company had reached agreement with the Trustee of the UK scheme for additional fixed contributions extending to 2016 based on the 
actuarial deficit at April 2007 and these arrangements have been confirmed under the actuarial valuation at April 2010. £3.2 million was paid 
in 2010, £3.5 million was paid in 2011 and further planned contributions amount to: 2012 £3.7 million; 2013 £3.9 million; then increasing by 
£0.2 million each year to £4.5 million in 2016. 

The Group also operates defined benefit schemes in the United States and Japan. Actuarial valuations of the schemes were carried out 
by independent qualified actuaries in 2007 and 2010 using the projected unit credit method. Pension scheme assets are stated at their 
market value at 31 December 2011. 

An analysis of the pension deficit by country is shown below:  

£million 

UK 
USA 
Japan 

2011 

32.1  
3.1  
0.3  
35.5  

2010

38.6 
2.2 
0.4 
41.2 

The principal assumptions used for the purpose of the actuarial valuations for the Group’s primary defined benefit scheme, the UK scheme, 
were as follows:  

% 

Discount rate 
Inflation rate 
Increases to pensions in payment 

2011 

4.7  
2.7  
2.5–3.2 

2010

5.4 
3.5 
2.5–3.5

A decrease in the discount rate by 0.1% per annum increases the liabilities by approximately £6.8 million. An increase in the inflation rate 
of 0.1% per annum increases the liabilities by approximately £4.2 million.  

The expected percentage long-term rates of return on the main asset classes, net of expenses, set by management having regard to actuarial 
advice and relevant indices were:  

2011 

6.8  
4.1  
2.5  
0.1  

2010

7.4 
4.8 
3.4 
0.1 

% 

Equities 
Bonds 
Gilts and swaps 
Cash 

104 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
22 Retirement benefit schemes (continued) 
The mortality tables applied by the actuaries at 31 December 2011 were S1NA tables adjusted by + one year, with future improvements increasing 
in line with medium cohort with a 1% p.a. floor.  

The amounts recognised in respect of the pension deficit in the Consolidated balance sheet are:  

£million 

Equities 
Bonds 
Gilts and cash 
Swaps 
Fair value of assets 
Present value of funded obligation 
Net liability recognised in the Consolidated balance sheet 

2011

213.9 
78.6 
26.9 
58.6 
378.0 
(413.5)
(35.5)

2010

199.8 
36.8 
63.0 
38.5 
338.1 
(379.3)
(41.2)

2009

190.0 
36.8 
61.6 
18.1 
306.5 
(350.2)
(43.7)

2008 

174.7  
25.8  
48.7  
33.9  
283.1  
(301.7) 
(18.6) 

2007

182.0 
12.4 
103.8 
– 
298.2 
(315.6)
(17.4)

The schemes’ assets do not include the Group’s financial instruments nor any property occupied by, or other assets used by the Group. 
Swaps are liability driven instruments taken out to hedge part of the scheme inflation and interest rate risks.  

Amounts recognised in the Consolidated income statement are:  

£million 

Current service cost 
Settlement/curtailment gain 
RPI/CPI change to indexation 
Interest on employee obligations 
Expected return on pension scheme assets 

2011

0.1 
– 
(7.5)
20.0 
(19.0)

2006

187.8 
10.9 
73.4 
– 
272.1 
(344.7)
(72.6)

2010

0.3 
(4.3)
– 
19.8 
(19.3)

Of the current service cost of £0.1 million (2010: £0.3 million), £0.1 million (2010: £0.2 million) is included in cost of sales in the income statement 
and £nil (2010: £0.1 million) is included in administrative expenses. 

The actual return on schemes assets was a gain of £49.3 million (2010: £45.2 million). Actuarial gains and losses are recognised directly in retained 
earnings and reported in the Consolidated statement of comprehensive income and, since transition to IFRS, amount to a net loss of £36.3 million.  

Changes in the present value of the defined benefit obligation are: 

£million 

Defined benefit obligation at 1 January 
Current service cost 
Interest on obligation 
Scheme participant contributions 
RPI/CPI change to indexation 
Settlement/curtailment gain 
Change in actuarial estimates and assumptions 
Benefits paid 
Defined benefit obligation at 31 December 

2011

379.3 
0.1 
20.0 
– 
(7.5)
– 
36.5 
(14.9)
413.5 

2010

350.2 
0.3 
19.8 
0.2 
– 
(4.3)
31.8 
(18.7)
379.3 

TT electronics plc 105   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

22 Retirement benefit schemes (continued) 
Changes in the fair value of the schemes’ assets are:  

£million 

Fair value of schemes’ assets at 1 January 
Expected return on schemes’ assets 
Excess of actual over expected returns 
Contributions by employer 
Contributions by employees 
Benefits paid 
Fair value of schemes’ assets at 31 December 

2011 

338.1 
19.0 
30.3 
5.5 
– 
(14.9)
378.0 

2010

306.5 
19.3 
25.9 
4.9 
0.2 
(18.7)
338.1 

The experience adjustments arising on the scheme’s assets and liabilities are reported in the Consolidated statement of comprehensive income 
and are as follows:  

£million 

Experience adjustments on schemes’ liabilities 
Experience adjustments on schemes’ assets 

2011

(36.5)
30.3 
(6.2)

2010

(31.8)
25.9 
(5.9)

2009

(44.5)
15.8 
(28.7)

2008 

22.2  
(25.4) 
(3.2) 

2007 

37.8 
0.5 
38.3 

2006

(6.2)
9.4 
3.2 

The Group expects to contribute approximately £3.7 million of additional fixed contributions to defined benefit schemes in the UK in 2012. 

23 Share capital 
£million 

Issued and fully paid 
155,217,949 (2010: 155,124,724) ordinary shares of 25p each 

2011 

2010

38.8 

38.8 

During the year the Company issued 93,225 ordinary shares as a result of share options being exercised under the 2004 Approved Plan and 
Unapproved Plan and the Sharesave scheme. The aggregate consideration received was £0.1 million, which was represented by a £0.1 million 
increase in share premium. 

24 Share-based payment plans 
The Company has the following share-based payment plans in operation at 31 December 2011: 

•  Share option schemes, which are closed for future grants; 

•  Long Term Incentive Plans (“LTIP”) for senior executives; 

•  Restricted Share Plan for certain senior executives; and 

•  Sharesave plans for UK, German and Austrian employees; and Share Purchase plans for US employees. 

a) Share option schemes 
Details of the share options outstanding during the year are as follows:  

2011 

Weighted 
average 
exercise price 
(p) 

138.2  
–  
128.9  
145.0  
186.1  
115.9  
145.0  

Number of 
share options

1,136,161 
– 
(140,818)
(77,234)
(338,541)
579,568 
142,297 

Number of 
share options 

2,618,043 
– 
(1,090,999)
(171,929)
(218,954)
1,136,161 
234,595 

2010

Weighted 
average 
exercise price 
(p)

135.3 
– 
140.9 
145.0 
91.5 
138.2 
145.0 

At 1 January 
Granted 
Forfeited 
Exercised 
Expired 
At 31 December 
Exercisable at 31 December 

106 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
24 Share-based payment plans (continued) 
At 31 December 2011 options were exercisable over 579,568 (2010: 1,136,161) Ordinary shares under the Group share option schemes up to 2015. 
Subscription prices range from 80p to 165p with a weighted average of 115.9p and a weighted average remaining contractual life of 1.32 years 
(2010: 2.44 years). Options are equity settled, have a life of ten years (with the exception of certain schemes where the options lapse after six years 
if the performance criteria are not achieved) and vest after three years. Exercise of the options is conditional on there being an increase in earnings 
per share over any consecutive three year period above the increase in the Retail Price Index over the same period. 

Following the approval of the Long Term Incentive Plan 2005 at the Extraordinary General Meeting held on 20 October 2006, all existing share 
option schemes were closed for future grants.  

b) Long Term Incentive Plans 
Details of the LTIP awards outstanding during the year are as follows:  

At 1 January 
Granted 
Forfeited 
Vested 
Expired 
At 31 December 
Exercisable at 31 December 

2011

2010

Number of 
share awards

Number of 
share awards

6,305,879 
1,525,800 
(291,811)
– 
(930,121)
6,609,747 
–

5,458,293 
1,846,920 
(339,988)
– 
(659,346)
6,305,879 
–

During 2010 and 2011 grants of awards were made under the LTIP for the issue of shares in 2013 and 2014 respectively. The award is a 
contingent right to receive shares in the future, subject to continued employment and the achievement of predetermined performance criteria. 
The performance targets attached to awards require the achievement of earnings per share (“EPS”) and total shareholder return (“TSR”) targets as 
detailed in the Directors’ remuneration report on page 62.  

On 27 April 2011 and 18 October 2011, grants of awards were made under the LTIP for the issue of up to 1,490,800 and 35,000 shares in 2014. 
On 4 May 2010 and 24 September 2010, grants of awards were made under the LTIP for the issue of up to 1,781,178 and 65,742 shares in 2013. 

The fair value of the shares was estimated at the grant date using a Monte Carlo simulation model, taking into account the terms and conditions 
upon which the shares were granted. This model simulates the TSR and compares it against the group of comparator companies. It takes into 
account historic dividends and share price fluctuations to predict the distribution of relative share price performance. 

The following table lists the inputs to the model:  

Number of awards 
Fair value at grant date 
Share price at grant date 
Exercise price 
Expected volatility 
Expected weighted average life at 31 December 2011 

2011 

Shares with a 
18 October 2011 
grant date

Shares with a 
27 April 2011 
grant date 

Shares with a 
24 September 2010 
grant date

35,000 
126.0p
149.8p
£nil
66%
2.9 

1,490,800  
148.5p 
176.5p 
£nil 
66% 
2.3  

65,742 
128.8p
146.0p
£nil
68%
1.8 

2010

Shares with a 
4 May 2010 
grant date

1,781,180 
94.1p
105.0p
£nil
68%
1.3 

The award of shares is not affected by the risk free rate of interest since no investment is required by the recipient, and therefore no interest 
could be earned elsewhere. Expected volatility is based on historic share price movements. 

On 27 April 2011, 113,000 (4 May 2010: 140,000) notional share awards were granted to senior executives which will ultimately be settled in cash. 
These awards are subject to the same vesting criteria as the 27 April 2011 (4 May 2010) LTIP grant.  

The LTIP grants made in 2008 did not vest but the grants made in 2009 are forecast to vest in full based on the performance conditions. 

TT electronics plc 107   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

24 Share-based payment plans (continued) 

c) Restricted Share Plan 
On 24 September 2010, the Group granted 259,515 shares under a restricted share plan to certain senior executives. The award is a contingent 
right to receive shares with a three-year vesting period subject to continued employment with the Group and no performance conditions. 
Details of the restricted share plan awards outstanding during the year are as follows:  

At 1 January  
Granted 
Forfeited 
Exercised 
Expired 
At 31 December  
Exercisable at 31 December  

2011 

2010

Number of  
share awards 

Number of 
share awards

259,515  
–  
–  
–  
– 
259,515  
– 

– 
259,515 
– 
– 
–
259,515 
–

The fair value of the shares at grant date was 139.0p. On 24 October 2010, the Company purchased 259,515 shares at a cost of £0.4 million 
through an Employee Benefit Trust. These shares are dilutive for the purpose of earnings per share. 

d) Sharesave schemes 
The Group operates Sharesave schemes for participating employees in the UK, Germany and Austria under either a three-year or five-year plan. 
Employees may purchase the Group’s shares at a 20% discount to the market price on the day prior to the commencement of the offer up to a 
maximum contribution value of £3,000 (UK) or €3,480 (Germany/Austria) in any one year. Monthly contributions are saved with LloydsTSB plc, via 
Equiniti Ltd, the Registrars, in the employee’s share savings plan and will only be released to employees who remain in the Group’s employment 
for a period of either three or five years from commencement of the savings contract. Options become exercisable on completion of either the 
three or five year term or within six months of leaving in certain circumstances. 

UK 
Germany/Austria 
UK 

The fair value of the shares at grant date was as follows:  

Pence 

3 year scheme 
5 year scheme 

Details of the Sharesave awards outstanding during the year are as follows:  

Date price set

Market price 

Option price 

3 September 2010
19 April 2011
2 September 2011

142.5p 
169.0p 
162.0p 

114.0p 
136.0p 
130.0p 

2011 

Germany/ 
Austria 

83.6  
93.9  

UK

77.9 
87.5 

UK 

70.0  
79.0  

Options 
outstanding

1,306,507 
130,801 
288,204 

2010

Germany/
Austria

–
–

At 1 January  
Granted 
Forfeited 
Exercised 
Expired 
At 31 December  
Exercisable at 31 December 

2011 

2010

   Number of share 
awards 

Number of share 
awards

1,492,920  
425,702  
(177,119) 
(15,991) 
– 
1,725,512  
30,695  

– 
1,492,920 
– 
– 
–
1,492,920 
–

On 26 September 2011 the Group launched a Stock Purchase Plan for participating US employees. Under the plan employees may purchase 
the Group’s shares at a 15% discount to the market price at the date of acquisition, up to a maximum of $6,500 per annum. Employees save 
on a monthly basis and shares are purchased each quarter. 

The total share-based payment charge for the year (excluding social security charges of £0.3 million) arising from the above share scheme plans 
was £1.7 million (2010: £0.3 million).  

108 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
 
  
25 Hedging and translation reserves 

£million 

At 1 January 2010 
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations 
Tax on exchange differences 
Loss on hedge of net investment in foreign operations 
Cash flow hedges 
Foreign exchange loss on disposals taken to income statement 
At 1 January 2011 
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations 
Tax on exchange differences 
Loss on hedge of net investment in foreign operations 
Cash flow hedges 
At 31 December 2011 

26 Retained earnings  
£million 

At 1 January 2010 
Profit for the year 
Fair value of minority put option 
Dividends paid by the Company 
Actuarial net loss on defined benefit pension schemes (see note 22) 
Tax on actuarial amounts in pension deficit movement 
At 1 January 2011 
Profit for the year 
Fair value of minority put option 
Dividends paid by the Company 
Actuarial net loss on defined benefit pension schemes (see note 22) 
Tax on actuarial amounts in pension deficit movement 
At 31 December 2011 

Hedging 
reserve 

Translation 
reserve

(11.5) 
–  
–  
–  
(0.2) 
–  
(11.7) 
–  
–  
–  
0.2  
(11.5) 

38.7 
2.1 
0.1 
(0.9)
– 
(1.7)
38.3 
0.9 
0.1 
(0.6)
– 
38.7 

Total

27.2 
2.1 
0.1 
(0.9)
(0.2)
(1.7)
26.6 
0.9 
0.1 
(0.6)
0.2 
27.2 

86.3 
25.9 
(3.5)
(1.2)
(5.9)
8.1 
109.7 
25.0 
(1.9)
(5.0)
(6.2)
(2.3)
119.3 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 109   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Group accounts

Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued 

27 Reconciliation of net cash flow to movement in net funds/(debt)  

£million 

At 1 January 2010 
Cash flow 
Non-cash items 
Exchange differences 
At 1 January 2011 
Cash flow 
Non-cash items 
Exchange differences 
At 31 December 2011 

Borrowings and 

Net cash 

finance leases  Net (debt)/funds

24.5  
19.1  
–  
0.6  
44.2  
14.8  
–  
(0.2) 
58.8  

(81.4) 
27.5  
(0.6) 
0.4  
(54.1) 
11.0  
(0.5) 
–  
(43.6) 

(56.9)
46.6 
(0.6)
1.0 
(9.9)
25.8 
(0.5)
(0.2)
15.2 

Net cash includes overdraft balances of £10.7 million (2010: £0.6 million). 

28 Contingent liabilities  
The Group has contingent liabilities amounting to £1.2 million (2010: £1.0 million) in respect of performance bonds and guarantees entered into in 
the normal course of business. The Group is subject to claims which arise in the ordinary course of business. Other than those for which provisions 
have been made and included within note 18, the Directors consider the likelihood of any other claims giving rise to a significant liability to 
be remote.  

29 Capital commitments 
£million 

Contractual commitments for the purchase of property, plant and equipment 

30 Operating leases 
Operating lease payments charged to the income statement are as follows:  

£million 

Fixtures and equipment 
Land and buildings 

The Group has outstanding commitments under non-cancellable operating leases, which fall due as follows:  

£million 

In less than one year 
Between one and five years 
After five years 

2011 

9.7  

2011 

0.4  
2.7  

2011 

3.4  
9.6  
1.8  

2010

3.2 

2010

0.3 
4.0 

2010

3.3 
9.1 
3.7 

Lease terms for land and buildings are predominantly for less than ten years with rents fixed for an average of four years. There are no 
contingent rents. 

110 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
31 Related party transactions 
Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries have been eliminated on consolidation and are not disclosed in this note.  

No related party transactions have taken place in 2011 or 2010 that have affected the financial position or performance of the Group. 

Key management personnel and Directors’ emoluments are disclosed in note 11. 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 111   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Company accounts

Company balance sheet 

£million 

Fixed assets 
Tangible assets 
Investments 
Deferred tax asset 

Current assets 
Debtors 
Cash at bank and in hand 

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year 
Net current assets 
Total assets less current liabilities 
Pension liability 
Net assets 
Capital and reserves 
Called up share capital 
Share premium account 
Profit and loss account 
Shareholders’ funds 

Approved by the Board of Directors on 14 March 2012 and signed on their behalf by:  

G Anderson  
Director  

S D Dasani 
Director 

Note 

2011 

2010

2 
3 
11 

4 

5 

10 

6 
8 
8 

3.1  
119.7  
9.0  
131.8  

76.2  
1.3  
77.5  
(9.8) 
67.7  
199.5  
(32.1) 
167.4  

38.8  
0.5  
128.1  
167.4  

2.2 
128.8 
11.1 
142.1 

59.5 
10.0 
69.5 
(10.2)
59.3 
201.4 
(38.6)
162.8 

38.8 
0.4 
123.6 
162.8 

112 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
 
  
 
 
  
 
 
Financial statements – Company accounts

Notes to the Company financial statements 

1 Significant accounting policies 

Basis of preparation 
The financial statements of TT electronics plc (the Company) are presented as required by the Companies Act 2006 and have been prepared 
under the historical cost convention as modified by the revaluation of financial assets and derivatives held at fair value and in accordance with 
applicable United Kingdom accounting standards and law. 

The following amendments to standards have been adopted in these financial statements for the first time. Adoption of these standards did not 
have a significant impact on the financial position and performance of the Company. 

•  The amendment to FRS 8 “Related party disclosures”; and 

•  The amendment to SSAP 25 “Segmental reporting”.  

There are no new standards or amendments to standards which are issued but not yet effective.  

The principal accounting policies are summarised below and have been applied consistently throughout the current and prior year:  

Tangible fixed assets and depreciation  
Tangible fixed assets are stated at cost less a provision for depreciation. Depreciation is calculated so as to write-off the cost less estimated residual 
value of tangible fixed assets, in equal instalments over their expected useful lives. No depreciation is provided on freehold land. The depreciation 
rates for the major categories of asset are given in note 2 to the consolidated financial statements. The carrying values of fixed assets are reviewed 
for impairment when there is an indication that the assets may be impaired.  

Investments  
Fixed asset investments in subsidiaries are carried at cost less provision for impairment. 

Deferred taxation  
Deferred taxation is the taxation attributable to timing differences between the results computed for taxation purposes and results as stated in the 
financial statements. It is recognised on all timing differences where the transaction or event which gives the Company an obligation to pay more 
tax, or the right to pay less tax in the future, has occurred by the balance sheet date. Deferred tax assets are recognised when it is more likely than 
not that they will be recovered. Deferred tax is measured using the rates of tax enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.  

Pension costs  
The Company operates a pension scheme providing benefits based on final pensionable pay. The assets of the scheme are held separately from 
those of the Company. 

Pension scheme assets are measured using market values. For quoted securities the current bid price is taken as market value. Pension scheme 
liabilities are measured using a projected unit method and discounted at the current rate of return on a high quality corporate bond of equivalent 
term and currency to the liability. 

The pension scheme deficit is recognised in full with the movement in the scheme deficit being split between operating charges, finance items 
and, in the statement of total recognised gains and losses, actuarial gains and losses. 

Foreign currencies  
Assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into sterling at the rates of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date. 

Share-based payments  
Certain employees of the Company receive part of their remuneration in the form of share-based payment transactions, whereby employees 
render services in exchange for shares or rights over shares (equity-settled transactions). The cost of equity-settled transactions with employees 
is measured at fair value at the date at which they are granted. The fair value of share awards with market-related vesting conditions is determined 
by an external consultant and the fair value at the grant date is expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period based on the Company’s 
estimate of shares that will eventually vest. The estimate of the number of awards likely to vest is reviewed at each balance sheet date up to the 
vesting date at which point the estimate is adjusted to reflect the actual outcome of awards which have vested. No adjustment is made to the fair 
value after the vesting date even if the awards are forfeited or not exercised. 

Leases  
Payments under operating leases are charged to the profit and loss account on a straight-line basis over the lease term.  

Derivative financial instruments 
Derivative financial instruments used to manage exposure to interest rate risk and to changes in currency exchange rates are measured at fair 
value. All changes in fair value are recognised in the profit and loss account.  

TT electronics plc 113   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial statements – Company accounts

Notes to the Company financial statements continued 

1 Significant accounting policies (continued) 

Own shares held by Employee Benefit Trust 
Transactions of the Company-sponsored Employee Benefit Trust are treated as being those of the Company and are therefore reflected in the 
Company’s financial statements. In particular, the trust’s purchases of shares in the Company are debited directly to equity. 

2 Tangible fixed assets 

£million 

Cost 
At 1 January 2011 
Additions 
Disposals 
At 31 December 2011 
Depreciation 
At 1 January 2011 
Charge for the year 
Disposals 
At 31 December 2011 
Net book value 
At 31 December 2011 
At 31 December 2010 

Freehold  
land and  
buildings 

Plant,  
equipment  
and vehicles 

2.9  
–  
–  
2.9  

0.8  
–  
–  
0.8  

2.1  
2.1  

0.8  
1.1  
(0.6) 
1.3  

0.7  
0.1  
(0.5) 
0.3  

1.0  
0.1  

Freehold land and buildings includes freehold land with a carrying value of £0.6 million (2010: £0.6 million). 

3 Fixed asset investments  

£million 

Cost 
At 1 January and 31 December 2011 
Provisions for impairment 
At 1 January 2011 
Charge for year 
At 31 December 2011 
Net book value 
At 31 December 2011 
At 31 December 2010 

Total

3.7 
1.1 
(0.6)
4.2 

1.5 
0.1 
(0.5)
1.1 

3.1 
2.2 

Subsidiary 
undertakings

129.4 

0.6 
9.1 
9.7 

119.7 
128.8 

The Company’s principal operating subsidiary undertakings and their locations are shown in note 14.  

The Company owns 100% of the ordinary share capital or equivalent and 100% of voting rights of all subsidiary undertakings other than 
Padmini TT electronics Private Limited which is 51% owned and Rodco Limited, which is non-trading and is 60% owned. Shareholdings are 
held indirectly for all principal operating subsidiary undertakings.  

The impairment charge for the year relates to the Company’s investment in Automotive Electronic Systems Limited, an intermediate 
holding company. 

4 Debtors 
£million 

Amounts falling due within one year 
Trade debtors 
Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings 
Prepayments and accrued income 
Corporation tax 

114 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

2011 

–  
74.5  
1.7  
–  
76.2  

2010

0.1 
57.8 
1.4 
0.2 
59.5 

 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
 
 
5 Creditors 
£million 

Amounts falling due within one year 
Trade creditors 
Derivatives financial instruments 
Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings 
Taxation and social security 
Accruals and deferred income 

6 Share capital 
£million 

Issued called up and fully paid 
155,217,949 (2010: 155,124,724) Ordinary shares of 25p each 

2011

1.4 
– 
2.9 
0.6 
4.9 
9.8 

2011

38.8 

2010

0.5 
0.2 
3.3 
0.5 
5.7 
10.2 

2010

38.8 

During the year the Company issued 93,225 Ordinary shares as a result of share options being exercised under the TT electronics plc 2004 Inland 
Revenue Approved Company Share Option Plan, the TT electronics plc 2004 Unapproved Company Share Option Plan and the Sharesave 
scheme. The aggregate consideration received was £0.1 million, which was represented by a £0.1 million increase in share premium. 

7 Share-based payments  
Details of share-based payments are shown in note 24 of the consolidated financial statements. 

8 Reserves 

£million 

At 1 January 2011 
New shares issued 
Actuarial net loss on defined benefit pension schemes 
Tax on actuarial amounts in pension deficit movement 
Share-based payments 
Deferred tax on share-based payments 
Dividends paid by the Company 
Profit for the year 
At 31 December 2011 

Share 
premium

Profit and 
loss 
account

0.4 
0.1 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
0.5 

123.6 
– 
(5.6)
(2.4)
1.7 
0.3 
(5.0)
15.5 
128.1 

9 Profit for the year  
As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the Company has elected not to present its profit and loss account for the year. The profit 
after tax of the Company for the year was £15.5 million (2010: loss of £12.9 million). The auditor’s remuneration for audit services is disclosed in 
note 6 to the consolidated financial statements. 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 115   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
Financial statements – Company accounts

Notes to the Company financial statements continued 

10 Pension schemes  

Defined benefit scheme 
In October 2010 the Company agreed with the Trustee of the UK pension scheme to apportion the pension scheme liabilities from the 
participating employers to the Company. Further details of the UK defined benefit pension scheme are shown in note 22 to the consolidated 
financial statements.  

Defined contribution scheme 
The Company operates a Group personal pension plan for employees and pays contributions to administered pension insurance plans. 
The Company has no further payment obligation once the contributions have been paid. Payments to the defined contribution scheme are 
charged as an expense as they are incurred. The total contributions charged by the Company in respect of the year ended 31 December 2011 
were £0.3 million (2010: £0.2 million).  

11 Deferred tax 
The deferred tax asset of £9.0 million (2010: £11.1 million) is made up of an asset of £8.0 million (2010: £10.4 million), the movement of which has 
been recognised in equity in respect of the pension liability, and an asset of £1.0 million (2010: £0.7 million), the movement in which has been 
recognised in equity in respect of share-based payments.  

At 31 December 2011, the Company had the following items for which no deferred tax assets have been recognised: 

•  Tax losses £19.7 million (2010: £9.8 million); and 

•  Property, plant and equipment £0.3 million (2010: £0.5 million). 

12 Commitments under operating leases 
Annual commitments under non-cancellable operating leases were as follows:  

£million 

On leases expiring: 
Within one year 
Between two and five years 

Land and 
buildings

– 
0.4 
0.4 

Other

0.1 
0.3 
0.4 

2011 
Total

0.1 
0.7 
0.8 

Land and  
buildings 

Other 

–  
0.4  
0.4  

–  
–  
–  

2010 
Total

– 
0.4 
0.4 

13 Related party transactions 
During 2011 and 2010, the Company did not have any related party transactions other than with wholly owned subsidiaries. 

116 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
  
 
14 Principal operating subsidiaries  
The principal operating subsidiaries are:  

Components  
International Resistive Company, USA, Barbados 
BI Technologies, USA, Mexico 
Optek Technology, USA, Mexico 
Semelab Limited 
AB Mikroelektronik GmbH, Austria  
Welwyn Components Limited  
AB Connectors Limited  
AB Interconnect Inc, USA  
New Chapel Electronics Limited 
AB Electronics (Suzhou) Co Ltd, China 

Sensors 
AB Elektronik GmbH, Germany  
AB Elektronik Sachsen GmbH, Germany  
Padmini TT electronics Private Limited, India (51% owned) 
AB Elektronik Sensors (Suzhou) Co Ltd, China 

Integrated Manufacturing Services  
TT electronics integrated manufacturing services Limited  
TT electronics integrated manufacturing services (Suzhou) Co Ltd, China  
TT electronics integrated manufacturing services Inc, USA  
BI Technologies, Malaysia  

Secure Power 
Ottomotores SA de CV, Mexico  
Ottomotores Comercializadora SA de CV, Mexico 
Dale Power Solutions plc  
Ottomotores Do Brasil Energia Ltda, Brazil 

Companies are located and incorporated in the UK except where indicated.  

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

TT electronics plc 117   
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Shareholder information

Five year record 

£million (unless otherwise stated) 

Revenue 
Operating profit(2) 
Profit before taxation(2) 
Earnings/(loss)(2) 
Earnings/(loss) per share (p)(2) 
Dividends – paid and proposed 
Dividend per share – paid and proposed (p) 
Average number of shares in issue 
Net cash/(debt) 
Total equity 

Notes  

(1)  Results for 2010 have been adjusted to exclude discontinued operations. 

(2)  Operating profit, profit before taxation, earnings and earnings per share are stated before exceptional items. 

2011

591.3 
34.2 
29.5 
20.6 
13.3 
6.8 
4.40 
154.9 
15.2 
191.4 

2010(1)

555.5 
24.9 
20.6 
13.9 
9.0 
4.3 
2.80 
154.8 
(9.9)
179.1 

2009 

463.5  
6.4  
0.8  
(1.8) 
(1.2) 
–  
–  
155.0  
(56.9) 
155.8  

2008

584.3 
27.0 
21.1 
14.3 
9.2 
5.7 
3.69 
155.0 
(113.2)
212.9 

2007

544.9 
37.7 
33.3 
24.0 
15.5 
15.6 
10.05 
154.9 
(75.0)
182.3 

118 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
 
 
 
Shareholder information

Shareholder information 

Annual General Meeting  
The Annual General Meeting will be held on 15 May 2012 at 11.30 am at the offices of Hudson Sandler Financial and Corporate 
Communications, 2nd Floor, 29 Cloth Fair, London EC1A 7NN. 

Results  
Announcement of 2012 half year results – late August 2012.  

Preliminary announcement of 2012 results – mid March 2013.  

Annual report 2012 – to be posted mid April 2013.  

Dividends  
For the year ending 31 December 2011, the Board has recommended a final dividend of 3.2p per share which will be paid on 8 June 2012 
to shareholders on the register on 25 May 2012 (2010: 2.0p). An interim dividend of 1.2p per share was paid on 3 November 2011 (2010: 0.8p).  

Multiple accounts on the shareholder register  
If you have received two or more copies of this document, this means that there is more than one account in your name on the shareholder 
register. This may be caused by either your name or address appearing on each account in a slightly different way. For security reasons, the 
Registrars will not amalgamate the accounts without your written consent, so if you would like any multiple accounts combined into one 
account, please write to Equiniti Limited at the address given below.  

Share dealing services  
Shareview Dealing is a telephone and internet service provided by Equiniti and provides a simple and convenient way of buying and selling 
TT electronics plc shares.  

Log on to www.shareview.co.uk/dealing or call 0845 603 7037 between 8.30 am and 4.30 pm, Monday to Friday, for more information about 
this service and for details of the rates and charges.  

A weekly postal dealing service is also available and a form together with terms and conditions can be obtained by calling 0871 384 2248*. 
Commission is 1.75 per cent with a minimum charge of £30.  

ShareGift  
ShareGift is a charity share donation scheme for shareholders, administered by The Orr Mackintosh Foundation. lt is especially for those who 
may wish to dispose of a small parcel of shares whose value makes it uneconomical to sell on a commission basis. Further information can 
be obtained at www.sharegift.org or from Equiniti.  

Shareholder enquiries  
Equiniti maintain the register of members of the Company. If you have any queries concerning your shareholding, or if any of your details 
change, please contact the Registrars:  

Equiniti Limited  
Aspect House  
Spencer Road  
Lancing  
West Sussex  
BN99 6DA  

Telephone 0871 384 2396* (or +44 121 415 7047 if calling from outside the United Kingdom)  
Fax 0871 384 2100*  

Textphone for shareholders with hearing difficulties 0871 384 2255*  

Equiniti also offer a range of shareholder information on-line at www.shareview.co.uk 

*UK calls to 0871 numbers are charged at 8p per minute from a BT landline. Other telephony provider costs may vary. Lines are open from 8.30 am to 5.30 pm, Monday to Friday. 

Website  
Information on the Group’s financial performance, activities and share price is available at www.ttelectronics.com 

TT electronics plc 119   
Annual Report 2011

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

h
t
w
o
r
g
r
o
f
n
a
p
r
u
O

l

1
1
0
2
n

i
s
s
e
r
g
o
r
P

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
s
l

a
i
c
n
a
n
F

i

n
o
i
t
a
m
r
o
f
n

l

i
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
S

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Shareholder information

Shareholder notes 

120 TT electronics plc 
Annual Report 2011

 
 
Contents
Overview

Embedding	innovation

1	
2	 Chairman’s	statement
2011	performance
3	

Our plan for growth

6	 Our	business	model
8	 Our	drivers
10	 Our	strategy	
Our	strategy	in	action
12	 –	Focus
14	 –	Innovation
16	 –	Globalisation
18	 –	Culture
20	 Execution
22	 Key	performance	indicators

Progress in 2011

Financial statements

Shareholder information

118		Five	year	record
119	 Shareholder	information

25	 How	we	are	structured
26	 Operating	review
28	 Components
31	 Sensors
34	
IMS
36		 Secure	Power
38	 Financial	review
41	

	Principal	risks	and	risk	
management	process

44	 Corporate	responsibility

Governance

47	
48	

Introduction	by	the	Chairman
	Board	of	Directors	and	
Company Secretary

50	 Operating	Board
51	 Corporate	Governance
57	 Nominations	Committee
58	 Audit	Committee
60	 Remuneration	report
67	 Other	statutory	disclosures

 Group accounts
70	 Statement	of	Directors’		

responsibilities

71		 Report	of	the	Independent		
Auditors	on	the	financial		
statements

72		 Consolidated	income	statement
73		 Consolidated	statement		
of comprehensive	income

74	 Consolidated	balance	sheet
75		 Consolidated	statement		
of	changes	in	equity
76		 Consolidated	cash	flow		

statement

77		 Notes	to	the	consolidated		
financial	statements

 Company accounts
112		Company	balance	sheet
113	 	Notes	to	the	Company	
financial statements

	Online	report

Please	see	our	website	for	additional	content:

www.ttelectronics.com

Using your smartphone, scan this 
code to access enriched content. 
Or	visit:	http://investors.	
ttelectronics.com/

Cautionary statement on forward-looking statements and related information

This	document	contains	a	number	of	forward-looking	statements	relating	to	the	Group/Company	with	respect	to,	amongst	others,	
the following:	financial	conditions;	results	of	operations;	economic	conditions	in	which	the	Group/Company	operates;	the	business	
of the	Group/Company;	and	management	plans	and	objectives.	The	Group/Company	considers	any	statements	that	are	not	historical	
facts	as	“forward-looking	statements”.	They	relate	to	events	and	trends	that	are	subject	to	risks	and	uncertainties	that	could	cause	
the	actual	results	and	financial	position	of	the	Group/Company	to	differ	materially	from	the	information	presented	in	the	relevant	
forward-looking	statement.	When	used	in	this	document	the	words	“estimate”,	“project”,	“intend”,	“aim”,	“anticipate”,	“believe”,	“expect”,	
“should”	and	similar	expressions,	as	they	relate	to	the	Group/Company	or	the	management	of	it,	are	intended	to	identify	such	
forward-looking	statements.	Readers	are	cautioned	not	to	place	undue	reliance	on	these	forward-looking	statements	which	speak	
only	as	at	the	date	of	this	document.	Neither	the	Group/Company	nor	any	member	of	the	Group’s/Company’s	Board	or	management	
undertake	any	obligation	publicly	to	update	or	revise	any	of	the	forward-looking	statements,	whether	as	a	result	of	new	information,	
future	events	or	otherwise,	save	in	respect	of	any	requirement	under	applicable	laws,	the	Listing	Rules,	and	other	regulations.

Designed	and	produced	by	Radley Yeldar	(www.ry.com)	using	the	paperless	proofing	system	Wizardry.	

TT	electronics	plc	are	committed	to	caring	for	the	environment	and	looking	for	sustainable	ways	to	minimise	our	impact	on	it.

This	report	has	been	printed	on	Hello	Silk	a	paper	which	is	certified	by	the	Forest	Stewardship	Council®.

The	paper	is	made	at	a	mill	with	EMAS	and	ISO	14001	environmental	management	system	accreditation.

This	report	was	printed	using	vegetable	oil	based	inks	by	a	CarbonNeutral®	printer	certified	to	ISO	14001 	
environmental	management	system	and	registered	to	EMAS	theEco	Management	Audit	Scheme.

FSC	–	Forest	Stewardship	Council.	This	ensures	there	is	an	audited	chain	of	custody	from	the	
tree	in	the	well-managed	forest	through	to	the	finished	document	in	the	printing	factory.

 ISO 14001	–	A	pattern	of	control	for	an	environmental	management	system	against	which	
an	organisation	can	be	credited	by	a	third	party.

014995_TT_AR11_Cover.indd   2

28/03/2012   19:32

 
	
	
	
	
	
	
	
TT electronics plc

Clive House
12 – 18 Queens Road
Weybridge
Surrey KT13 9XB

Reg No 87249

Tel   +44(0) 1932 825300
Fax  +44(0) 1932 836450

TT electronics plc Annual Report 2011

Embedding 
innovation

l

T
T
e
e
c
t
r
o
n
i
c
s
p
l
c

A
n
n
u
a

l

R
e
p
o
r
t
2
0
1
1

For further information on our group please visit:

www.ttelectronics.com

014995_TT_AR11_Cover.indd   1

21/03/2012   16:49